Home

CubeSuite Ver.1.40 Integrated Development Environment User`s

1. R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 231 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Python Console panel This panel is used to use IronPython to control CubeSuite and the debug tool via the command input method Figure A 70 Python Console Panel PythonConsole oe The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Python Console panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Python Console Description of each area 1 O area Enter and run IronPython functions and control statements and CubeSuite Python functions The results of function execution and errors are also displayed File menu Python Console panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Python Console panel other items are common to all the pan els Save Python Console Saves the content displayed in the current panel in the last text file txt to be saved Note that if this item is selected first after the program starts then the behavior is the same as selecting Save Python Console As Save Python Console As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents currently displayed on this panel in the designated text file txt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 232 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu
2. Specification format debugger Address expression Argumeni s Return value Converted address Detailed description This function converts the address expression specified by expression into the address Example of use gt gt gt debugger Address main 0x4088 gt gt gt debugger Address main 1 0x4099 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 271 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Assemble Disassemble This function performs disassembly Specification format debugger Assemble Disassemble address number 1 code True Argumeni s address Specify the address at which to start disassembly number Specify the number of lines to display default 1 code Specify whether to display instruction codes True Display instruction codes default False Do not display instruction codes Return value None Detailed description This function performs disassembly from the address specified by address If number is specified the specified number of lines are displayed If code is set to False then instruction codes are not displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 0x00004088 F545 br TestInit 0x8e gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 2 0x00004088 F545 br TestInit 0x8e OxO0000408A OA5A mov Oxa r11 gt gt gt deb
3. 2 Creating and adding an empty file Select the Download files node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 243 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 5 Add File Dialog Box Adding a Load Module File Add File File type C source file c Header file h ric Assemble file asm s gi Text file tet All files In the dialog box specify the file name to be created newly and the location in which it is created and then click the OK button The project tree after adding the load module file will look like the one below Figure E 6 Project Tree Panel After Adding Load Module File a out Project Tree E E DebugOnly Project F Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool ch V85O Simulator Debug Tool a 3 OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool L 3p File ral Download Files od E 3 2 Add C source files and other files Add C source files to be used for creation of the download file to the debug dedicated project By adding the C source file to the project you can perform source level debugging step execution in source level units etc You can also add files other than C source files as necessary By double clicking the added file name on the project tree you can open the Edi
4. R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 236 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED This section describes the manuals included with the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for the 78KO microcontroller 78KOR microcontroller and V850 microcontroller The manuals are organized as follows in accordance with the software development phases Figure C 1 List of Manuals Preparation Design Implementation Debug Programming Programming Manual of each microcontroller d T8K0 78KOR 850 Common manual Notes 1 The manuals provided will differ depending on which products are installed 2 The CubeSuite Start includes instructions on builds in the design implementation processes when using an external build tool 1 Start This manual describes an outline of CubeSuite It also describes installation updates license settings and other information It describes the operations from launching CubeSuite to creating a project 2 Design This manual describes the design tool pin assignment and code generation 3 Coding This manual describes the roles and functions of the commands of the C compiler assembler and other tools included with CubeSuite It provides information necessary for development using the C compiler and assembler as well as expert knowledge on effective c
5. 2 Toolbar The toolbar shows common command buttons See the CubeSuite Build and CubeSuite Debug for buttons relating to building and debugging Buttons on the toolbar can be customized in User Setting dialog box You can also create a new toolbar in the same dialog box a Start amp Save In the Start amp Save the button group concerning the start button the file operation and the edit is displayed a rewena Oooo a inanmasa OOO B emaan O o i mewe eaten O EL Hy ie Opens the Search and Replace dialog box or the Trace Search dialog box if the Trace panel has focus or the Memory Search dialog box if the Memory panel has focus and per form the specified search Searches backward in the panel being searched using the specified parameters ci Searches forward in the panel being searched using the specified parameters b Build toolbar Build tooloar shows buttons used in build process Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Remark For details on a build rebuild clean or batch build see the following When the target project
6. Empty C source In the dialog box specify the file name to be created newly and the location in which it is created and then click the OK button The project tree after adding the file and folder will look like the one below Note that the location of the file added below the File node depends on the current settings of Toolbar in the Project Tree panel Figure E 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree E DebugOnly Project JE uPD7031314 Microcontroller Fe A Pin Configurator Design Tool A Mone Build Tool ce Y85O Simulator Debug Tool kK OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool 5 A File ral Download Files c ete R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 246 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 11 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree E E DebugOnly Project ME uPD7031314 Microcontroller E A Fin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool ca WESO Simulator Debug Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Ei File ral Download Files E 3 3 Remove an added file from a project To remove a file s that has been added to the debug dedicated project by using the method above select the file s on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure E 12 Remove from Project Item Lj File tL Download Files o
7. This menu is only enabled if there is text on the caret line Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column Open in New Panel Opens a new Editor panel with the same contents as the current Editor panel the title bar of the newly opened Editor panel displays the file name and ID number The Editor panel can be opened up to 100 panels Note This function is only available when the following conditions are satisfied See CubeSuite Debug for details When the build tool to be used is CX The target is a function variable or label in C language When the build tool to be used is CA78KO CA78KOR or CA850 The load module file with the symbol information has been built The target has been defined in the active project The type of a project specified as active project is Application When a project type is Debug Only a debug dedicated project The load module file with the symbol information has been added to the Download files node The target has been defined in the active project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 137 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel The message that is output from the build tool debug tool each plug in or the result of the Whole Search with the Search and Replace dialog box is displayed Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool The All Messages tab c
8. How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Show space marks Shows space characters in the text editor default oOo Does not show space characters in the text editor R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 175 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Show control codes Shows control codes e g tab newline and EOF in the text editor default oOo Does not show control codes e g tab newline and EOF in the text editor 3 Distinct display for CR LF CR and LF This item is only enabled if the Show contro codes check box is selected Visually distinguishes line break types CR LF CR and LF in the text editor default Does not visually distinguish line break types CR LF CR and LF in the text editor 4 Use external text editor Uses an external text editor The External text editor area is enabled Use it to specify the external text editor to use B Uses the Editor panel as the text editor default 5 External text editor area This area is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected Use this area to specify the external text editor to use and the startup options a External text editor path Either type in the name of the executable file including absolute path for the external text editor directly via the keyboard up to 259 characters or click the Br
9. Save Project Saves the configuration information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the configuration information of the current project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file system Save Project and CubeSuite as Saves a Set of the CubeSuite and the project by copying them in a folder Package R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 99 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Build The Build menu shows menu items for the build process Note that only menu items that are displayed when the target project type is a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL are shown here See the CubeSuite Build for the information about building for a project other than a debug dedicated project Build Project Runs a build of the project see E 5 1 Runa build A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild of the project see E 5 2 Run a rebuild A rebuild of a Subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean
10. Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a c
11. A Mone Build Tool es YE850 Simulator Debug Tool J OR Programmer Flash Progra Drop a file s here Fo Download Files out a ot b Add a folder Drag a folder s from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the File node on the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Figure E 8 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj o Text file tet All files Sublolder level to search R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 245 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL In the dialog box select the types of the files to be added and specify the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the debug dedicated project At this time you can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected And then click the OK button 2 Creating and adding an empty file Select the File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Figure E 9 Add File Dialog Box Adding a File Add File File type C source file c Header file inc Assemble file asm s Text file tet All files
12. Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in D tagged Intel format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload IntelldTag testIdTagIintel hex 0x1000 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 322 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Motorola This function saves the memory data in Motorola format Specification format debugger Upload Motorola fileName address1 address2 force False Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address to address2 in Motorola format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Motorola testMotorola hex 0x1000 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 323 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload MotorolaldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Motorola format Specification format debugger Upload MotorolaldTag fileName address1 address2 force False Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite
13. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Search location Designate the location to search Select either one of the following items from the drop down list or directly enter the file location from the keyboard maximum number 10 Current opened files Active project Main project and subprojects Folder Name Searches within all the opening the Editor panel If no file is opened in the Editor Panel this item is disabled Searches within the text file included in the active project When File type is specified searches only the specified type Note that is the current project does not exist this item is disabled Searches within the text file included in the main project and subproject When File type is specified searches only the specified type Note that is the current project does not exist this item is disabled Searches within the text file in the folder specified by directly entering the maximum characters 259 the path relative path is from the project folder or specified in the Browse For Folder dialog box opened by clicking the button in this area When fold ers are not specified the project folder name is shown in by default folder if the project does not exist the current user document folder is shown When File type is specified searches only the specified type Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4 Opt
14. This function registers a hook or callback function Caution Issue this function after connecting the debugging tool If it is issued before connecting to the debug tool then the hook or callback function will not be reg istered Specification format Hook scriptFile Argumeni s scriptFile Specify the script file where the hook or callback function is defined Return value None Detailed description This function loads scriptFile and registers a hook or callback function Hook functions are called after CubeSuite events occur The types of hook function are shown below Note that hook functions do not take parameters BeforeDownload Before download AfterDownload After download AfterCpuReset After CPU reset AfterCpuStop After break Example Sample script file def BeforeDownload Processing you want to perform before the download Hook functions are initialized by the following operations When a project file is loaded When a new project file is created When the active project is changed When the debugging tool is switched Callback functions are called after CubeSuite events occur R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 267 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS The name of the callback function is pythonConsoleCallback The parameter of the callback function is the callback trigger e After memory or regis
15. This function saves the coverage data Specification format debugger Upload Coverage fileName force False Argumeni s fileName Specify a file name force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the coverage data to a file Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Coverage CoverageData csrcv gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 320 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload intel This function saves the memory data in Intel format Specification format debugger Upload Intel fileName addressl1 address2 force False Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in Intel format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Intel testIntel hex 0x1000 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 321 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload IintelldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Intel format Specification format debugger Upload IntelIdTag fileName address1 address2 force False
16. This node is created during a build Files created by the build tools are displayed directly below the node except for object files Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the project This node is always shown under the File node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project These user defined categories are used to classify files into modules Note that this node is always shown under the files node Page 114 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project Hereafter referred to as Subproject node Remarks 1 Only the tools corresponding to the microcontroller in use are shown 2 When more than one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When more than one files are selected and their common properties are different that field is left blank 3 See APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on a debug dedicated project This area has the following functions a Import project files If you drag the project file from the windows explorer and drop in this area you can open the project in Main Window b Add subprojects You can add subprojects by one of the following procedure lt 1 gt Add an existing subproject Select Proj
17. Abort Forces the currently running command to stop R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 233 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite Uninstaller window This window is used to specify one or more installed CubeSuite products to uninstall at once Figure A 71 CubeSuite Uninstaller Window ac Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the items to be uninstalled f Select all Unselect all Product o CubeSuite CAFBKO Vioxx Function buttons CubeSuite CAPEKOR Vix CubeSuite Code Generator Common Ss CubeSuite Device Information 7AF List CubeSuite Device Information 860 Package CubeSuite Device Information 78K0A Package CubeSuite Emulator Utilities The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Uninstaller Description of each area 1 Select Tools area The CubeSuite products that are installed appear here Select the check boxes of the tools to uninstall 2 Progress Graph area This area displays a progress bar of the uninstallation process 3 Progress Details area This area displays information about ongoing and completed uninstalls for each tool to be uninstalled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 234 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDI
18. Open Existing Project Loads the project of Cubesuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Nothing Nothing Drop here to open the project file cspij Open Existing PM Project The PM projects for 78KOR 78K0 V850 of PM version 6 00 and later can be loaded directly The loaded projects are converted to a project for CubeSuite for each project group and new project files are created in the original project folder Open Sample Project Many sample projects that can be built immediately are provided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 78K0 78KOR V850 78kOkx2 ce cs i ee sc i DISCONNECT R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 38 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Create a Project A project is managed by CubeSuite as the unit for application system development CubeSuite saves settings information used in the project such as the microcontroller build tool and source files to the project file cspj and references it 1 Project tree organization and detailed settings The project s settings are made on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 40 Project Tree Panel Project Tree Lz sample Project JFE uPDFOF3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Fe Device Pin List Td Device Top view H Gode Gener
19. This function displays timing information between Go and Break Specification format debugger XTime Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function displays timing information between Go and Break in nanoseconds Example of use gt gt gt debugger XTime 9820214200nsec gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 337 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTrace Clear This function clears the trace memory Specification format debugger XTrace Clear Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function clears the trace memory Example of use gt gt gt debugger XTrace Clear gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 338 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTrace Dump This function dumps the trace data Specification format debugger XTrace Dump frameCount fileName append False Argumeni s frameCount Specify the number of dumps fileName Specify the name of the file to dump to default not specified append Specify whether to append trace data to the file True Append trace data to the file False Do not append trace data to the file default Return value None Detailed description This function dumps tra
20. When mapping emulation memory alternative ROM RAM in the V850 IECUBE specify the one of the following chip selects as a string csO cs1 cs2 cs3 cs4 cs5 cs6 or cs7 For models in the V850ES series however the chip select allocation is fixed or the chip select will not function so this can be omitted If chip select is specified then accessSize cannot be omitted Return value None Detailed description This function performs memory mapping with the memory type specified by map Type Example of use gt gt gt debugger Map Set MapType EmulationRom 0x100000 Ox1l0ffff gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 306 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Copy This function copies the memory Specification format debugger Memory Copy address1 address2 address3 Argumeni s address1 Specify the start address to copy from address2 Specify the end address to copy from address3 Specify the address to copy to Return value None Detailed description This function copies the memory from address1 to address2 into address3 Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Copy 0x1000 0x2000 0x3000 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 307 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Fill This function copies th
21. 3 Rearrange Commands Function buttons Keyboard The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Categories area Display a list of the categories of commands that CubeSuite provides 2 Commands area Display a list of the names of commands belonging to the category selected in the Categories area together with their icons if exist When All Commands is selected in the Categories area the name of all commands that CubeSuite provides are displayed together with their icons if exist To add a command on a toolbar menu drag and drop the command name in this area onto the toolbar menu dis played in the actual Main window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 197 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Buttons Modify Selection Rearrange Commands Function buttons J In order that the menu item or the button on a toolbar currently selected in the Main window displays the following menu items beneath this button Menu Item Reset Delete Name Default Style Text Only Always Text Only in Menu Image and Text Begin a Group Recently Used Resets the selected menu item button Deletes the selected menu item button Displays the name of the selected menu item button
22. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetCpuStatus This function displays the current CPU status Specification format debugger GetCpuStatus Argumeni s None Return value Current CPU status Detailed description This function displays the current CPU status Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetCpuStatus Stop gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 296 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetleStatus This function displays the current IE status Specification format debugger GetIeStatus Argumeni s None Return value Current IE status Detailed description This function displays the current IE status Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetIeStatus None gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 297 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetPC This function displays the PC value Specification format debugger GetPC Argumeni s None Return value PC value Detailed description This function displays the PC value Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetPC Ox92BO0 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 298 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS deb
23. Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Window menu select Other Windows Description of each area 1 Select divide panel area Selecting a divide panel switches the target Function buttons Activates the divide panel selected in the Select divide panel area and close this dia log box Close Window s Closes the divide panel selected in the Select divide panel area and close this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 214 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Project dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing project or select the project file to designate the project to divert when creat ing a new project Figure A 63 Open Project Dialog Box Open Project Lok in gt A e m C DefaultBuild i E sample ib My Recent C sample 850 Documents sample csp Desktop My Documents PL e Computer oe gt File name gt Files of type Project File for Cube Suite cspij Ww Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Project menu select Open Project In the Create Project dialog box click the Browse button in Diverting project in the project file area Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the project file of the p
24. Install Status area The installation will halt when the installation of the tool cur rently being installed finishes 8 Confirm the results of the installation When all setup related tasks are finished the results of the installation appear Figure 2 10 Setup Completion Window 3 Installer step BiB Setup Completion Setup it complete Click Finish to exit setting All installations were completed successtully The latest product update information can be checked when the Launch Update Manager is checked i When a project is created or opened for the first time with a new device l the administrator authorization is required Install the USB driver for E1 emulator Ce CubeSuite B Click the Finish button to complete the installation Remark When having a check in a Launch Update Manager check box the CubeSuite Update Manager window opens after completing the installation See 2 4 Using the Update Feature for the update method R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 20 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 2 Uninstalling CubeSuite You can uninstall CubeSuite using the CubeSuite Uninstaller 1 Launch CubeSuite Uninstaller From the Windows the Start menu select Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Uninstaller The CubeSuite Uninstaller window is launched Figure 2 11 CubeSuite Uninstaller Window Renesas Electronics C
25. Remark When the input violates any restriction the following message will be shown in the tooltip More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be maximum number of restriction in the property that specified The current number of characters is dis called this dialog box played between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 146 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 147 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 30 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode 1 ooo Build mode list DefaultBuild Duplicate Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode
26. Return value None Detailed description This function downloads a hex file with ID tag Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download HexIdTag testModule hex gt gt gt debugger Download HexIdTag testModule2 hex 0x1000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 290 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Information This function displays download information Specification format debugger Download Information Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function displays download information in the following format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Information 1 DefaultBuild test 1lmf R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 291 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download LoadModule This function downloads a load module Specification format debugger Download LoadModule fileName downloadOption DownloadOption Both append False Argumeni s Specify an option downloadOption The options that can be specified are shown below DownloadOption NoSymbol Do not load symbol information DownloadOption SymbolOnly Only load symbol information DownloadOption Both Load both symbol information and object information default append Specify whether
27. See the CubeSuite Build for details about this tab Category node Category information tab See the CubeSuite Build for details about this tab Notes 1 For details on the debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 2 This tab is also displayed in the following case CA78K0 CA78KOR When Yes is selected in Output assemble file property in Assembly File category in Individual Compile Options tab CA850 When Yes is selected in Set individual compile option property in Build category in Build Settings tab CA850 When a C source file is selected and on the Individual Compiler Options tab under the Out put Files category the Output assembly files property is set to Yes Fs b Click the Generate Code button in the Code Generator panel Macro Setting tab See the CubeSuite Design for details about this tab c On the Code Generator Preview panel select file File Setting tab See the CubeSuite Design for details about this tab Remark When more than two components are selected in Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 125 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel The
28. W W W W W r in W W W J OB Programnmer Flash Programming Tool File a Build tool generated files out sample out hex sample hex s Startup s starts c_ main c E sub Subproject JBE uPD70F3746 Microcontroller El A Pin Configurator Design Tool ce Code Generator Design Tool 4 C4850 Build Tool cee W850 Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a 3 OB Programnmer Flash Programming Tool a i File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Toolbar Edit menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Help menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Context menu R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 113 of 353 Oct 01 2010 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 How to open From the View menu select Project Tree Description of each area 1 Project tree area APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed in the Property panel You can change the settings Project name Project Subsequently called Project node Microcontroller name Microcontroller Hereafter referred to as Microcontroller node Design Tool name Design Tool Hereafter referred to as Design Tool node Build tool name
29. can be specified When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be specified More than 10 subfolder levels have been speci fied Specify in decimal A number in other than decimal or a string has been specified Function buttons OK Adds the folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder to the project And then closes this dialog box Does not add the folder and files and then closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 144 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 28 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Build Mode Settings dialog box select a build mode to be duplicated from Build mode list and then click the Duplicate button Description of each area 1 String area Input characters in one line By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following mes
30. debugger Breakpoint Delete breakNumber Argumeni s Specify the break event number to delete Return value None Detailed description This function deletes the break event specified by breakNumber If breakNumber is not specified then breaks of all break event numbers will be deleted Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Enable 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Disable 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Delete 1 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 274 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Disable This function disables a break point setting Specification format debugger Breakpoint Disable breakNumber Argumeni s Specify the break event number to disable Return value None Detailed description This function disables the break event specified by breakNumber If breakNumber is not specified then breaks of all break event numbers will be disabled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Enable 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Disable 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Delete 1 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 275 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Enable This function enables a break point setting Specification format de
31. 2 10 Execute Python Fuctions When you start CubeSuite from the command line you can specify and execute a script file see 2 11 Manipulate CubeSuite on the Command Line When loading a project file you can run a script you have prepared in advance see F 2 Related File F 2 Related File Below is a related file of CubeSuite Python functions project file name py If there is a file in the same folder as the project file and with the same name as the project file but with the py extension then that file is executed automatically when the project file is loaded download file name py If there is a file in the same folder as the download file and with the same name as the download file but with the py extension then that file is executed automatically after downloading F 3 CubeSuite Python Functions Below is a list of CubeSuite Python functions classes and properties Table F 1 CubeSuite Python Function List Common CubeSuiteExit This function exits from CubeSuite This function displays the help for the CubeSuite Python functions This function registers a hook or callback function This function saves all editing fles and projects Table F 2 CubeSuite Python Function List For Debug Tool debugger Address This function evaluates an address expression debugger Assemble Disassemble This function performs disassembly debugger Assemble LineAssemble This function performs line assembly debugger
32. Breakpoint Delete This function deletes a break point R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 261 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger le GetValue debugger le Set This function sets references the IE register or DCU register Value debugger sConnected This function checks the connection status of the debug tool debugger sRunning This function checks the execution status of the debug tool debugger Jump File debug This function displays each panel ger Jump Address R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 262 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger ReturnOut This function runs until control returns to the program that called the current func tion Table F 3 CubeSuite Python Class List BreakCondition This class creates a break condition Table F 4 CubeSuite Python Property List Property Name Function Description debugger Download CpuReset debug This property sets or reference the download property of the debug tool ger Download FlashErase debugger Memory NoVerify Memory NoVerify debugger Memory NoVerity This property switches the write time verification setting This property switches the write time verification setting 0 switches the write time verification setting R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 263 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F P
33. Build tool Hereafter referred to as Build Tool node Debug tool name Debug tool Hereafter referred to as Debug Tool node Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Hereafter referred to as Analyze Tool node QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Hereafter referred to as Flash Programming Tool node File Hereafter referred to as File node Download files Hereafter referred to as Download files node Build tool generated files Hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node Startup Hereafter referred to as Startup node Category name Hereafter referred to as Category node CENESAS The project s name The microcontroller used in the project The design tool pin configurator code generator etc used Note that Code Generator Design Tool node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project The build tool compiler assembler etc used When the project type is a debug dedicated project None is shown as build tool name The debug tool in circuit emulator simulator etc used The analyze tool used Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project The flash programming tool used Files registered to the project are displayed directly below the File node This is a node for adding download files to the project Note that this node is shown only when the project type is a debug dedicated project
34. Caution Files that are in the project folder and have been registered to the project can be monitored The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been regis tered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build 3 Enable Break Sound Beeps when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break F Does not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break default 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 188 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Update category Use this category to configure general setting relating to update Figure A 49 Option Dialog Box General Update Category General 7 a l General Update A Startup and Exit B a AJ Display 1 pi Check for updates when opening project T Ei Fert and car Font and Color 2 Check at intervals of Dave ase 3 zei U
35. Checking this menu item returns the display style of the selected menu item button to the default state by default Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed This is enabled only when a menu item is selected Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by both text and icon Inserts separator just before the selected menu item button This item is not supported in this version Opens the Rearrange Commands dialog box for changing the arrangement including addi tion and deletion of menu items and tool bar buttons in the Main window Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Cancels the toolbar menu customization setting and closes this dialog box Close Function R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 198 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE New Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new toolbar to appear in the Main window Figure A 54 New Toolbar Dialog Box Hew Toolbar Toolbar name Location 2 Docked Top hl The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog b
36. False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in D tagged Motorola format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload MotorolaldTag testIdTagMotorola hex 0x1000 0Ox2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 324 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Tektronix This function saves the memory data in Techtronics format Specification format debugger Upload Tektronix fileName addressl1 address2 force False Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address to address2 in Techtronics format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Tektronix testTektronix hex 0x1000 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 325 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload TektronixldTag This function saves the memory data in D tagged Techtronics format Specification format debugger Upload TektronixIdTag fileName addressl1 address2 force False Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return
37. Folder with Explorer on the context menu Figure 2 56 Open Folder with Explorer Item For a Project 2 8SO SimGlat Open Folder with Explorer amp Program Ana IHF OB Program a lb File FE Save Project and CubeSuite as Package E s Rename Property Remark When you select Open Folder with Explorer from a file s context menu the folder the file is saved in is opened in Explorer R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 52 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project You can convert a CubeSuite project with CA850 as the build tool into a project with CX as the build tool by creating the project reusing the file structure of a project When creating the project it is not necessary to code build tool dependent source because the source files are con verted for the CX The properties of the build tool are also maintained and converted for use with the CX Caution If you wish to reuse an existing PM project open the project in CubeSuite then save it as a CubeSuite project see 2 7 8 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project First from the Project menu select Create New Project the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 57 Create Project Dialog Box Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller the VESOE 2M w uPDdf3507 100pin Product Name wPD F500 Internal ROM size E bytes 126 Inter
38. None Detailed description This function displays the period information period time Periodic of the set XRunBreak If there is no XRunBreak setting None is displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None gt gt gt debugger xXRunBreak Set 1 TimeType S True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer 1Second Periodic R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 335 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XRunBreak Set This function configures XRunBreak settings Specification format debugger XRunBreak Set time timeType TimeType Ms periodic False Argumeni s timeType Specify the break time unit The units that can be specified are shown below periodic Specify whether to call the callback every time the specified time elapses True Call at every specified time interval False Call one time only default Return value None Detailed description This function configures XRunBreak settings The XRunBreak calling interval depends on the simulator Example of use gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None gt gt gt debugger xXRunBreak Set 1 TimeType S True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer 1Second Periodic R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 336 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTime
39. Note that there are no buttons on the newly created toolbar The register buttons on it use the Commands tab Rename Opens the Rename Toolbar dialog box to change the name of the currently selected toolbar This function is disabled when a toolbar other than those created by the user is selected R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 195 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Delete Deletes the selected toolbar This function is disabled when a toolbar other than those created by the user is selected Reset Discards all changes made to the selected toolbar and returns it to the default state When a toolbar created by the user is selected this button returns the selected toolbar to the state with no buttons registered on it Function buttons Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization settings and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 196 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands tab You can customize items to include on a toolbar or a menu Figure A 53 User Setting Dialog Box Commands Tab User Setting Peer rere eee a Toolbars Commands l Categories Commands Coll Commands File Build 1 p Debug Exit Disassemble TIE Project Tree Property Mutput
40. Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 172 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Display category Use this category to configure general settings relating to program messages Figure A 42 Option Dialog Box General Display Category al General General aa WIENER al Z Vso Startup and Exit a Paa Display Text Editor Message dialog box display level Font and Cb 4 External ools Build Debug Toolbar diplay type 2 pds Others show function key commands p 4 Show window contents while resizing Tab width 6 select the file opened with text editor in project tree 7 hitialize Settings Function buttons hitialize All Settings Apply The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Message dialog box display level Select the Message dialog box display level verbosity from the following drop down l
41. Option area This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default The following options can be designated as search criteria a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Plain text Searches the characters designated in Search text Wild card Searches using the following wildcard Arbitrary characters Arbitrary one character b File type This item is disabled c Case sensitive Searches with the designated characters in case sensitive o Searches with the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Word by word Searches with a designated exact word oOo Searches with at least one of the words default e Open file before replacing This item is disabled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 163 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab Search Searches from the current caret position to the top of the file with the designated criteria Selects the characters that are searched and moves the caretN Search Forward Searches from the current caret position to the end of the file with the designated crite ria Selects the characters that are searched and moves the caret Replace and Forward Replaces the selected characters to the characters to be replaced then searches the next backwards cand
42. Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 JIn Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik L
43. You can also double click the title bar of the window or right click and select Floating This docks the window at its former docking position You can adjust the size of windows docked to the main window by clicking and dragging the splitters 2 9 4 Displaying multiple panels Click on a panel you wish to view and drag it over another panel you wish to view simultaneously As described in 2 9 3 Docking windows a docking indicator appears Move the mouse pointer to 13 and release the mouse over the location where you wish to place the panel left right top or bottom R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 66 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 5 Resetting the window layout From the Main window s View menu select Reset Layout The window layout is returned to its initial state Tet Reset Layout Figure 2 71 Reset Layout Item Project Tree Property Output Pin Configurator Watch CPU Register ei Trace Disassemble Event Program Analyzer 8 Show Current PC Location Ckrl L Back to Last Cursor Position Forward to Next Cursor Position Tag Jump ShiFt F 12 Save or Restore Docking Layout R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 67 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Execute Python Fuctions CubeSuite enables the execution of IronPython functions and control statements and Cube
44. a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Selected subproject Active Sets the selected subproject to an active project Project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system with this operation When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation You can rename the selected subproject Property Displays the selected subproject s property in Property panel 3 When a Microcontroller node is selected Property Displays the selected microcontroller s property in Property panel 4 When a Build Tool node is selected Only menu items that are displayed when a Build Tool node for a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL is selected are shown here See the CubeSuite Build for the information about the Build Tool node for a project other than a debug dedicated project Build Project Runs a build the selected project main project
45. and from the File menu select Save Variable List Data As Focus Analysis Chart panel and from the File menu select Save Analysis Chart Data As R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 224 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Description of each area 1 2 3 4 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file List of files area APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File list that matches the selections in Save in and Files of type area is shown File name area Specify the file name to save Save as type area a In the Editor panel The following file types file type are displayed depend on the file type of the currently editing file Text file txt C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm CA78KO CA78KOR CX Assemble file s CA850 CX Assemble file asm s Not 1 Link directive file dr dir CA78KO CA78KOR Link directive file dir dr CA850 CX Function information file fin N 2 CA78KO Variable and function information file vfi CA78KOR Section file sf CA850 Symbol information file sfg CX Map file map Symbol table file sym CA78KO CA78KOR Hex file hex hxb hxf CA78KO CA78KOR Hex file hex CA850 CX Notes 1 Text format C language source file Header file Assembler source file Assembler so
46. and provides an outline of its fea tures 1 1 Introduction CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE Note for the 78KO microcontroller 78KOR microcontroller and V850 microcontroller By integrating the necessary tools for each development phase it is possible to perform all phases in software develop ment using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Emphasis is placed on making the tools work together improving development efficiency in many different situations As an example the output from the design phase is automatically reflected in the debug phase CubeSuite also has an update feature to automatically obtain this product upgrades via the network making it simple to maintain the environment required for software development free downloadable tools excluded Note An integrated development environment is a development environment integrating the necessary tools for all phases of software development including design implementation coding and building and debugging into a single platform framework Remark In addition to CubeSuite emulators and on chip debugging emulators emulators for microcontrollers with on chip debugging facilities built in are provided as well as a real time OS package for developing sys tems using real time OSes making a wide range of development possible 1 2 Features CubeSuite s features are shown below 1 Project management Manage projec
47. been changed to use in a CX project exists in the case that the function is same as CA850 but the parameter does not exist in CX so it is changed to other one and the like the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Command name Tab name of build tool property Option of CA850 project gt Option of CX project This item is output only when the corresponding option exists CA850 options are converted into CX options which have the same function The option that has the same function and different name is not output Build modes are output in the following order DefaultBuild user created build mode DefaultBuild is the build mode that CubeSuite provides by default See CubeSuite Build for detail about a build mode R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 56 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 8 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project You can convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project automatically by selecting Open Project from the Project with CubeSuite The result of conversion is output to a file as project convert information 1 When opening from a PM workspace file prw Files are converted to CubeSuite projects according to the rules below The PM workspace is not converted PM project groups are divided into projects with the same name as the project group After conversion the project file name wil
48. box appears while the application is checking for updates Figure A 9 Checking for Updates Dialog Box f Checking updates 1 Gy Please wait The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Opens automatically while checking for updates Description of each area 1 Checking for Updates message area This area displays messages while checking for updates When the update check ends it closes automatically R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 87 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Update in progress dialog box This dialog box displays the progress of update download and installation Figure A 10 Update in progress Dialog Box Update in progress Gy Downloading updates Update status Downloading CubeSuite Vanes 232 complete Downloading 1 2 2 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Opens automatically while downloading and installing updates Description of each area 1 Update status area This area displays the current status of downloads and installs It automatically closes when the updates are downloaded and installed 2 Downloading Installing area Displays the proportion of the size of target downloads that is complete Displays the proportion of the number of tar
49. clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 131 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool for the debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build Mode 2 Build 3 Notes Figure A 23 Property Panel Build Options Tab Property A None Property E Build Mode Build mode DetaultBuild E Build Commands excecuted in the project building Commands excecuted in the project building 0 Commands excecuted in the project cleaning Commands excecuted in the project cleaning 0 Hotes Description of each category 1 Build Mode The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Select the build mode to be used during a build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction DefaultBuild Runs a build with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is added Runs a build with the build mode that is added to the project other tha
50. description of each tab R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 193 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 194 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbars tab You can set whether toolbars are displayed or not change toolbar names and make new toolbars Figure A 52 User Setting Dialog Box Toolbars Tab User Setting Toolbars Commands Toolbars Debug view Panels Layout Editor Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Toolbars area Display a list of the names of registered toolbars A check mark appears in front of the name of the toolbar currently displayed in the Main window By removing the check mark you make a setting so that the toolbar will not be displayed 2 Buttons Opens the New Toolbar dialog box to make a new toolbar The name of the new toolbar will be added to the list displayed in the Toolbars area with a check mark placed in front
51. dialog box is used to create new projects or subprojects Source Convert Setting dialog box CX This dialog box configures the composition files of the source project the source files and the like to convert them for the build tool of the project to be created Start panel Project Tree panel This panel is used to display components of the microcontroller build tool and source file of the project in tree view Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Also the settings of the selected node can be changed Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files Output panel The message that is output from the build tool debug tool each plug in or the result of the Whole Search with the Search and Replace dialog box is dis played Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the cur rent build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to
52. following dialog boxes are opened from the Property panel Character String Input dialog box See the Character String Input dialog box CubeSuite Start CubeSuite Build or CubeSuite Debug for details Text Edit dialog box See the Text Edit dialog box CubeSuite Start CubeSuite Build or CubeSuite Debug for details Path Edit dialog box See the CubeSuite Build for details Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Undoes any property changes being done Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Help menu Property panel dedicated items Open Help for Property Panel Displays the help of this panel Context menu Undoes any property changes being done Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to default of the project default confi
53. is a debug dedicated projectN This node is created during a build Files created by the build tools are displayed directly below the node except for object files Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated projectN This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the project This node is always shown under the File node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated projectN These user defined categories are used to classify files into modules Subprojects added to the project For subprojects see 2 Projects and subprojects Note See APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on a debug dedicated project Remarks 1 Only the tools corresponding to the microcontroller in use are shown 2 When more than one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When more than one files are selected and their common properties are different that field is left blank tENESAS Page 40 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Projects and subprojects Projects can have subprojects added to the level beneath them The subproject s settings information is saved to a subproject file cssp Subprojects for example are used in the following ways When also creating a project to create library files used in the project create a project to create library files
54. lists of successful canceled and failed updates Figure A 5 Finish Page G Finish Firash updating Cubeuite Legend Download gt Instal O Successi O Suspended Failed Bsuc cess 1 OCubeSuite Vz xx 1 Osusp ended 1 WO CubeSuite Update Manager Vx M0120000 1 Installation is suspended because CubeSutte Update Manager is running It will be resumed next time you start the tool OF ailed 1 Device Information 783K0R Ex2 Vz E01TZ0004 Installation was aborted The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Opens automatically when the update completes Description of each area 1 Update Results area Displays a list of update results Displays number of successful updates and update titles Displays number of canceled updates update titles and messages Displays number of failed updates update titles and messages R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 83 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE History page Use this page to display the history of updates performed and to copy or delete update files Figure A 6 History Page O History You can save disk space by deleting downloaded fles Also you may copy the files to other PCs to update elect all Copy Legend Download gt Instal O Successi O Suspended O Failed Title state Date Device Information VE50ES Sxz
55. not actually exist are displayed in this color color LightGray Note The Default text and background colors depend on the Windows settings of the host computer Here we use the Windows defaults which are black text and white background b Use default color Displays items selected via the Setting place area using the standard text color Displays items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined text color The Font color button is enabled c Use default background color Displays items selected via the Setting place area using the standard background color Displays items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined background color The Background Color button is enabled d Buttons Font Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the text color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default color check box is selected Background Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the background color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default background color check box is selected Reset Selected Item Colors Resets the color information for the item selected via the Setting place area to the defaults R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 180 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite V
56. one of the following items from the drop down list Plain text Searches the characters designated in Search text Wild card Searches using the following wildcard Arbitrary characters Arbitrary one character b File type This item is disabled c Case sensitive Searches with the designated characters in case sensitive o Searches with the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Word by word Searches with a designated exact word oOo Searches with at least one of the words default e Open file before replacing This item is disabled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 157 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab Search Backward Searches from the current caret position to the top of the file with the designated criteria Selects the characters that are searched and moves the caret Search Forward Searches from the current caret position to the end of the file with the designated crite ria Selects the characters that are searched and moves the caret Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box Note If the designated characters cannot be searched Can not found Search text is displayed on the status bar of the Main window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 158 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite V
57. open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu Toolbar Sorts files and Category nodes in Project tree area in order of their names Ascending order Descending order Ascending order Sorts files in Project tree area in order of the time stamp Sorts files and Category nodes in Project tree area in order of the user definition default Display order is changed by dragging and dropping the file and Category node R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 116 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Copies the selected file or Category node to the clip board While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are copied to the clip board Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or the Category node is selected Inserts the contents of the clip board to the root of the node that is selected on the Project Tree While editing the file name or the category name insert the contents of the clip board Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or the Category node exists If a project with the same contents is already on the clipboard however then if multiple files or Category nodes are selected and the build tool is running then it w
58. project file then the project file will not be saved correctly Change the name of the main project or the subproject Remark If you save the project file with a different name from the original project file and then modify one or both of them then the project files will have different contents 2 8 2 Save all files You can save the project file and all the files being edited From the File or Project menu select Save All the project file is overwritten with the current settings information and all files being edited are saved Figure 2 63 Save All Item 4dd Cr Close Project ER Save Project Ctrl Shift 5 Be Save Project s l Save all Ctrl Shift a gt ing Recent Files ee Recent Projects Exit 2 8 3 Pack and save the project and CubeSuite You can copy the product suite IDE language tools microcontroller information etc and project set also includes subprojects if they exist to a specified folder and save it organized into a single folder Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Save Project and CubeSuite as Package on the context menu the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 64 Message Dialog Box Question Q0202001 Saving the project components may take a few minutes to a few dozen 7 P j minutes Start processing R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 61 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To continue with
59. select the name of a user toolbar and then click the Rename button Description of each area 1 Toolbar name Edit the toolbar name directly via the keyboard By default the name of the currently selected toolbar is shown Function buttons Changes the selected toolbar to the specified name and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 201 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Customize Keyboard dialog box This dialog box is used to assign shortcut keys to the various commands Figure A 56 Customize Keyboard Dialog Box Customize Keyboard Specify a Command Categories Commands ll Commands Action Event Build Debug 1 Disassemble Add New Category Sod New File Add Wew Subproject Add Mew Watch 3 Currently assigned to Toggle Insert Mode Description Adds a file to a project Function buttons Reset All The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box click the Keyboard button Description of each area 1 Specify a Command area a Categories Display a list of the categories of commands provided by CubeSuite b Commands Display a list of the commands belonging to the category selected under Categories and t
60. selected by default After the newline code is changed the set newline code is selected by default 3 Reload the file Use this check box to select whether to reload the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked The check box is not selected by default Function buttons Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings of the encoding and newline code and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 154 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Search and Replace dialog box This dialog box is used to search and replace the designated characters Figure A 34 Search and Replace Dialog Box Search and Replace Search text abe Search location Current panel mairn c Function buttons Option Search Backward Search Forward Hee The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Search From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Search
61. set in the variable In order to create a break condition create an instance and set conditions for that instance R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 340 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt executeBreak BreakCondition gt gt gt executeBreak Address main gt gt gt pexecuteBreak BreakType BreakType Software gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Set executeBreak point in parameter gt gt gt gt gt gt dataBreak BreakCondition gt gt gt dataBreak Address chData gt gt gt dataBreak Data 0x10 gt gt gt dataBreak BreakType BreakType Access gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Set dataBreak point in parameter gt gt gt gt gt gt executeBreak Address sub 0x10 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Set executeBreak point in parameter gt gt gt create instance Specify function in which to set the break create instance Specify function in which to set the break Reuse break condition Specify function in which to set the break R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 341 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download CpuReset debugger Download FlashErase This property sets or reference the download property of the debug tool Specification format debugger Download CpuReset reset debugger Download Flas
62. startup is restored Reset Layout Returns all settings relating to the layout of the Main window docking panels to their default values Python Console Shows the Python Console panel Remark The layout is saved and restored in each of the following three states Before loading a project When a project is loaded and before a debug tool is connected When a project is loaded and a debug tool is being connected d Project Project menu shows menu items to operate the project Create New Project Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project Changes the current project or file to the new one If they have not saved con firm the user whether to save them Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project Changes the current project or file If they are not saved confirm the user whether to save them R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 98 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Favorites Projects Shows the cascading menu to open and add to your favorite project 1 Favorites Projects Selects Favorites Projects gt gt 1 Register Favorites Project to open the added project If no project is added Favorite Project is shown 2 Favorites Projects Selects Favorites Projects gt gt 2 Register Favorites Project to open the added project If no project is a
63. the build modes which the main project and subprojects have c Defined macros lt 1 gt When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project For the combination of the main project and subprojects and their build modes the defined macros which have been set in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel are separated with and displayed The defined macro in the compile option comes before the one in assemble option They are separated with and displayed lt 2 gt When the target project type is a debug dedicated project This item is invalid Function buttons Build Closes this dialog box and runs builds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the builds is displayed on the Output panel After the builds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Rebuild Closes this dialog box and runs rebuilds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the rebuilds is displayed on the Output panel After the rebuilds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Clean Closes this dialog box and deletes the files which are built in the respective build modes set for the selected project
64. the current version of CubeSuite 2 Product license area This displays license information corresponding to the license key R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 207 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Installed product area List each module name and its version used in CubeSuite Module Name Shows the module name Shows the current version of the module Explanation Shows the brief description of the module Function buttons Copy All Text Copies all the characters displayed to the clip board Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 208 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Contact Information for Technical Support dialog box This dialog box is used to displays necessary information to contact to Tool Support Center If you have an inquiry regarding CubeSuite copy the information shown in this dialog box and include it with your question when contacting technical support Note that technical support by the Development Tools Support Center is limited to purchasers of the Development Tool kit You cannot directly enter to the dialog box edit is not allowed Figure A 60 Contact Information for Technical Support Dialog Box Contact Information for Technical Support Please copy the following information and question to the following contacts Contacts Please enter the e mail address of
65. the operation click the Yes button on the dialog box When using external tools such as an external editor and files are being edited the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 65 Message Dialog Box OQuestion O0 701005 Save all the files currently being edited Remark This dialog box only appears if in the Option dialog box in the General Text Editor category you selected the Use external text editor property To continue with the operation click the OK button on the dialog box The Browse For Folder dialog box will open Figure 2 66 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder Select the Folder to package project and tool Ef Desktop My Documents H My Computer a4 My Network Places 2 Recycle Bin Make New Folder 7 Specify the save location folder on the dialog box Caution Specify a folder other than the project folder to save to If you click the OK button the copy process will begin The dialog box below is displayed during the copying process R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 62 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 67 Copying model editwaye dl From common to common Cancel 15 Seconds Remaining The save location folder structure is shown below Save location readme txt Explanation of the structure of errorlog txt A record of the files that Project name Project folder Instal
66. the project folder Use this check box to select whether to create a folder with the project name under the location specified in Place The check box is selected by default Project file path The full path of the project file specified via Project name and Place is shown Remarks 1 The number of characters that can be entered in Project name and Place is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip in Project name R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 108 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File name with the path is too long Shorten The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The designated path includes the folder that The path includes the folder that does not exist does not exist Invalid file name or path name The charac The file name with the invalid path is designated The ters lt gt cannot be used characters lt gt cannot be used for the folder name 2 When the project name and the path name is too long to be shown in each text area is dis played The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over rr 5 Pass project area Specify the name of the source project to pass and the location in which to create the new project file a Pass the file composit
67. then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select Add gt Add New File from the context menu and then create a text file or source file R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 134 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Title bar The name of the open text file or source file is displayed Marks that are displayed at the end of the file name indicate as follows The contents of the editing file is changed Uneditable The opened text file is write disabled The same text file is multiply opened 2 Line number area This area displays the line number of the opened text file or source file 3 Characters area This area displays character strings of text files and source files and you can edit it This area has the following functions a Character editing Characters can be entered from the keyboard Various shortcut keys can be used to enhance the edit function b File monitor The following function for monitoring is provided to manage source files If the contents of the currently displayed file are changed not with CubeSuite a message is displayed to indicate whether to save the file You can either select yes or no Remark The following items can be customized by setting the Option dialog box Display fonts Tab interval Display hide and colors of control characters control
68. this to generate the ROMization module file V850 load module file and hex file by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite Library CA850 CX CA78K0 CA78KOR Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CubeSuite i e creates a debug dedicated project See APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated project 4 Project Creation area The project name to create and the location of the project file are designated a b c d e Project name Directly enter the name of the project to create The entered project name is followed by the extension cspj and this forms the project file name Remark When the subproject is created the entered project name is followed by the extension cssp and forms the subproject name Place Designate the location to create the project file by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting from the Browse button The last designated location is shown in the box C Documents and Settings User name My Documents is shown by default when the project is created for the first time Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected an absolute path of the folder is shown in Place Make
69. to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If offset is specified then append must also be specified Similarly if append is specified then offset must also be specified Return value None Detailed description This function downloads a load module If fileName is not specified the file specified on the Download File Settings tab in the Property panel of the debugging tool is downloaded If downloadOption is specified the processing is performed in accordance with the specification Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download LoadModule testModule lmf gt gt gt debugger Download LoadModule testModule2 1lmf 0x1000 DownloadOption SymbolOnly True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 292 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Erase This function erases the Flash memory Specification format debugger Erase eraseOption EraseOption Code Argumeni s eraseOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description EraseOption Code Erase the code flash memory default MINICUBE MINICUBE2 EraseOption Data Erase the data flash memory EraseOption External Erase the flash memory in external space Caution IECUBE and the simulator do not have functionality to delete code flash m
70. units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B GLOSSARY APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS APPENDIX G INDEX How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Conventions Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Integrated Development Environment V 50 Debug Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners MEMO MEMO MEMO TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 11 1 1 Introduction 11 1 2 Features 11 1 3 System Configuration 13 1 4 Operating Environment 14 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1
71. value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in D tagged Techtronics format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload TektronixIdTag testIidTagTektronix hex 0x1000 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 326 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Watch GetValue This function references a variable value Specification format debugger Watch GetValue variableName encode Encoding Default watchOption WatchOption Auto Argumeni s Specify the variable name register name or I O register name SFR register name to ref erence encode Specify the encoding to use when displaying strings By default the system encoding is used The encoding name conforms to the NET specifications Examples Encoding utf 8 Encoding euc jp watchOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Return value None Detailed description This function displays the value of the variable specified by variableName If encode is specified then perform encoding using encode If watchOption is specified display according to watchOption R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 327 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugger Watch GetValu
72. 0 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing Subproject dialog box This dialog box is used to select subprojects for adding existing subprojects to projects Figure A 64 Add Existing Subproject Dialog Box Add Existing Subproject o skin oo gt a 3 Def aultBuild My Recent Documents j 5 Desktop My Documents 95 My Computer 3 Fie name 4 hi retro Files of type Subproject File for Cubes uite csep b Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File or Project menu select Add gt gt Add Subproject On the Project Tree panel select the Project node or Subproject node and then select Add gt gt Add Subproject from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the subproject file of the subproject to add exists The project folder is selected by default 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Specify the subproject file name of the subproject to add R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 217 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area The following file types file type are displayed Subproject file for CubeSuite cssp Subproject file for CubeSuite Function button
73. 00 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 170 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Startup and Exit category Use this category to configure general settings relating to startup and shutdown Figure A 41 Option Dialog Box General Startup and Exit Category Option General Startup and Exit Lisplay 1 Shete Open the One point Advice dialog bos at CubeSuite startup Font and Color 2 sternal cole Open the Splash window at CubeSuite startup 3 Build D ebug iy Update Load the last project at CubeSuite startup o Others User Information gt Initialize Settings Function buttons Tnitialize All Settings Apply The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Open the One point Advice dialog box at CubeSuite startup Shows the FormOnePoint dialog box on startup default Oo Does not show the FormOnePoint dialog box on startup 2 Open the Splash window at CubeSuite startup Shows the Splash window on startup default B Does not show the Splash window on startup 3 Load the last project at CubeSuite startup Automatically loads the last project on startup default oOo Does not automatically load the last project on startup R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 171 of 353
74. 04 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Commands area This area displays a list of commands belonging to the category selected in the Choose a menu or toolbar to rear range area which will be displayed in the Main window You can change the arrangement of these commands using the following buttons in this area Opens the Add Command Dialog Box for selecting a command to be added above the command cur rently selected in this area In the Add Command Dialog Box all commands that can be added are displayed grouped by their categories First select the category of command in the Categories area then select the command you want to add and press the OK button pressing the Cancel button cancels the addition of the command and closes this dialog box Deletes the command currently selected in this area Moves the command currently selected in this area up one line Moves the command currently selected in this area down one line Modify Selection Displays the following menu items for editing the arrangement of the menu item or button currently selected in this area Resets the selected menu item button Deletes the selected menu item button Displays the name of the selected menu item button Default Style Checking this menu item returns the display style of the selected menu item button to the default state by default Text Only Always Checking this menu item displays the selected menu it
75. 0UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 97 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save or Restore Docking Layout Displays commands relating to saving and restoring the docking layout in a cas cading menu Save Layout 1 Saves the docking layout in slot 1 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 1 Save Layout 2 Saves the docking layout in slot 2 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 2 Save Layout 3 Saves the docking layout in slot 3 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 3 Save Layout 4 Saves the docking layout in slot 4 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 4 Restore Layout 1 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 1 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 2 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 2 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 3 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 3 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 4 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 4 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first
76. 2 VEEE Detail Monday January xx sox HEHH AM O eE Device Information 7SEOR Ex Vex Q Monday January x KKE exe AM iis CubeSuite Update Manager Vz xz Monday January xx sox sec AM O i Device Information SEGRE VEE detail Monday January xx sx mrar AM QE CubeSuite Update Manager Vz xx b Detail Monday January x mom AHAH AM O O CubeSuite Vz Monday January x EKE Exe AM The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Review update history Description of each area 1 Button area Click Select all to select all the check boxes in the list Button Function Copies the selected updates to the specified folder Deletes the selected updates 2 Update History Display area Displays a history of updates performed In the status column of the list click Detail to display a message dialog box with a message corresponding to the results of the selected update R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 84 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Restore hidden updates page Use this page to display a list of updates hidden in the Select updates page restore the visibility of the selected updates and enable that update to be checked and installed again Figure A 7 Restore hidden updates Page G Restore hidden updates P You can restore hidden updates and th
77. 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Confirm that hidden updates are restored Confirm that the selected updates become unvisible on the Restore hidden updates page and become visible on the Select updates page Figure 2 37 Restore hidden updates Page Restore hidden updates 3 E You can restore hidden updates and then check agan to see which updates you stil need O E Cubesute Update Manager VEEE Download size z KB This is update for CubeSute Update Manager Figure 2 38 Select updates Page i G Select updates iz D It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date e EXDownload and install e Bownload only 0 Updates OKE CubeSuite O G CubeSuite VEZ Download size ux EB This is update for Cubeswte Detail R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 37 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Start CubeSuite Select Windows Start menu gt gt Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite CubeSuite is started Figure 2 39 Main Window Start Panel 3 CubeSuite Start Learn About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite The tutorial contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite wi Proleci A new project can be created new project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing project
78. 247 characters The folder name is invalid The following charac The folder name with the invalid path is designated ters cannot be used lt gt The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name The folder name is invalid Specify a folder other A folder inside the source project folder is specified than the diverted project folder When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over Function Closes this dialog box and creates a project according to the designated condition Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 112 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to display components of the microcontroller build tool and source file of the project in tree view Figure A 18 Project Tree Panel Project Tree x E Fi sample Project ME UPOFOFS746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Fa Device Pin List jf Device Top View H Gode Generator Design Tool ys te iti External Bus Port INT Serial 4D DA Timer Watchdog Timer RIG Clock Output Buzzer Output DMA LT 1 4 CAB50 Build Tool ee Y85O Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool W W
79. 3 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX G INDEX APPENDIX G A Add Existing Subproject dialog box 217 Add File dialog box 141 Add Folder and File dialog box 143 B Batch build 259 Batch Build dialog box 150 Browse For Folder dialog box 219 Build 254 Build mode 250 Build Mode Settings dialog box 148 Build Options tab 132 C change the project name 51 Character String Input dialog box 145 Checking for Updates dialog box 87 Clean 256 Commands tab 197 Contact Information for Technical Support dialog box 209 Create Project dialog box 106 CubeSuite License Manager window 92 CubeSuite Python functions 261 CubeSuite Uninstaller window 234 CubeSuite Update Manager window 75 Download and install page 79 Download only page 81 Error page 86 Finish page 83 History page 84 Restore hidden updates page 85 Select updates page 77 Customize Keyboard dialog box 202 D Debug dedicated project 241 INDEX Download and install page 79 Download only page 81 E Editor panel 134 Error page 86 F favorites menu 50 Finish page 83 G General Build Debug category 187 General Display category 173 General External Tools category 183 General Font and Color category 178 General Startup and Exit category 171 General Text Ed
80. 5 2 1 Installing CubeSuite 15 2 2 Uninstalling CubeSuite 21 2 3 Using the License Management Feature 23 2 3 1 Show license information 23 2 3 2 Add a license 24 2 3 3 Delete a license 24 2 4 Using the Update Feature 25 2 4 1 The manual update feature 25 2 4 2 The auto update feature 30 2 4 3 Canceling an update 32 2 4 4 Resuming an update 32 2 4 5 Displaying the update history 33 2 4 6 Restoring hidden updates 36 2 5 Start CubeSuite 38 2 6 Create a Project 39 2 6 1 Start a project 42 2 6 2 Create a new project 43 2 6 3 Add anew subproject 46 2 7 Manipulate a Project 48 2 7 1 Open a project 48 2 7 2 Add an existing subproject 49 2 3 Project is added to the favorites menu 50 2 7 4 Remove a subproject from the project 51 2 7 5 Change the project name 51 2 7 6 Open a project folder in Explorer 52 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project 53 2 7 8 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project 57 2 8 Save the Project File 60 2 8 1 Save the project file with a different name 60 2 8 2 Save all files 61 2 8 3 Pack and save the project and CubeSuite 61 2 8 4 Close a project 64 2 9 Changing the Window Layout 65 2 9 1 Automatically hide panels 65 2 9 2 Floating a window 65 2 9 3 Docking windows 66 2 9 4 Displaying multiple panels 66 2 9 5 Resetting the window layout 67 2 10 Execute Pytho
81. 56EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 115 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Select multiple nodes You can select multiple nodes in sequence by the following procedure Click or place the cursor on the start node then click with pressing the Shift key or place the cursor on the end node You can select multiple nodes one by one by the following procedures Click on the node with pressing the Ctrl key Place the cursor key on the node with pressing the Ctrl key then press Space key f Running the editor The file with the specific extension is opened in the Editor panel When an external editor is set to be used in the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS Caution The file with the extension that is not associated with the host OS is not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedures Double click the file Select a file and then select Open from the context menu Select a file and then press the Enter key The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c Assembler source file asm s Header file h inc Symbol information file sfg Link directive file dir dr Link map file map Hex file hex Text file txt Remark You can use one of the procedures below to
82. 8 When a Category node is selected Add File Add New File Add New Category Remove from Project Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project You can rename the selected Category node Property Displays the selected Category node s property on the Property panel Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Removes the selected Category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copies the selected Category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below
83. Automatic Updates CubeSuite can check for updates regularly Category If updates are found CubeS uite Device List Device Dependent Information Parameter File O Notify me but do not automatically download Update Manager them Others Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished Do nothing Internet Connections e a You can change the proxy settings used to check and download updates in the 1 Internet Options in Control Panel Remark During the download the io icon appears in the Task Tray 3 The update notification function After downloading the target update in 2 the update notification feature displays an icon amp notifying of the update in the Task Tray If any of the updates that were found for the first time during this auto check the A icon appears This function is executed without performing the download when in the Update Manager Options dialog box Notify me but do not automatically download them is selected This can be specified for each category Figure 2 28 Update Manager Options Dialog Box Update Manager Options Automatic Updates CubeSuite can check for updates regularly Category IF updates are found Cubes uite Download updates automatically and notify Device List me when it s finished Device Dependent Information Parameter File Update Manager Others Botity me but do not automatically download them Do nothing Internet Co
84. C OD D me oP lt S C D CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start Target Device 78KO Microcontroller 78KOR Microcontroller V850 Microcontroller All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 Oct 2010 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license exp
85. CENESAS Page 221 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Project As dialog box This dialog box is used to save project files as different names Figure A 66 Save Project As Dialog Box Save Project As Save gt D m O DefaultBuild E ta sample ib My Recent C sample _v850 Documents sample cspj E Desktop My Documents 98 My Computer a gt Filename Seve Save as hype Project File for CubeSuite csp Ww Cancel 1 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu or Project menu select Save Project As Description of each area 1 Save in area Select a folder to save the project file The project folder is selected by default 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Save in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Specify the project file name to save R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 222 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area The following file types file type are displayed Project file for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Function buttons Saves the project file as the designated file name R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 223 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPEN
86. DIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Figure A 67 Save As Dialog Box Save As Saveinm Q sc w My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents PE My Computer Save as hype C source file c Ww Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus Editor panel and from the File menu select Save file name As Focus CPU Register panel and from the File menu select Save CPU Register Data As Focus Watch panel and from the File menu select Save Watch Data As Focus SFR panel and from the File menu select Save SFR Data As 78KO 78KOR Focus IOR panel and from the File menu select Save IOR Data As V850 Focus Call Stack panel and from the File menu select Save Call Stack Data As Focus Local Variables panel and from the File menu select Save Local Variables Data As Focus Output panel and from the File menu select Save tab name As Focus Device Pin List panel and from the File menu select Save Device Pin List As Focus Device Top View panel and from the File menu select Save Device Top View As Focus Function List panel and from the File menu select Save Function List Data As Focus Variable List panel
87. Device Information 72EOR Ex Vu xx Detail Monday January xx EZE mirar AM Exit Q CubeSuite Update Manager Vx sx beta Monday January xx EZE Hira AM C E CubeSuite Vx x Monday January xe EZE excocEx AM Change settings NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20xx 1 Installing download files This section describes how to install download files a Select download files Select the check boxes of download files in the History page and click the Copy button Figure 2 31 History Page G History lt You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs to update Select at Cony Da Legend Download M Instal Successi O Suspended Failed Title State Date lO Code Generator Common Vz xx Monday September xx xxxx xxxxxx PM C f CubeSuite Vx xx Monday September xx mox uxcxxxx PM Device Dependent Information for 72BKOR Kx3 Vxxx Monday September xx mox mxx PM Device Dependent Information for 73K0 Fx2 Vexx Monday September xx xox xxxxxx PM R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 33 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Select a copy destination folder The Browse For Folder dialog box appears Figure 2 32 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder Select the Folder to package project and tool Desktop 4 My Documents E F My Computer i My Network Places Recycle Bin Make New Fold
88. Download only Update items selected on the Select updates page appears on the Download only page th CubeSuite Update Manager NEC ELECTRONICS Check the information and click the Download button Select updates All TSKOR KG3 uPD78F1166 AO Update Dewrload and install Download only Option Rewew update history Restore hidden updates Change settings Help Exit Figure 2 23 Download only Page G Download only 2 Updates z EB Z CubeSutte CubeSutte VEZ Download size z EB This is update for CubeSutte Detail Update Manager CubeSute Update Manager Vx x Download size m EB This is update for CubeSutte Update Manager Detail NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20xx R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 28 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 6 Confirm the download progress Update items are downloaded A progress bar on the Update in progress dialog box displays the download progress The download progress of each tool appear in the Update status area Figure 2 24 Update in progress Dialog Box Update in progress Gq Downloading updates Update status Downloading CubeSuite Wx ee 25 complete Downloading 1 2 CETL Remark See 2 4 5 Displaying the update history for instructions on installing download update items later 7 Display results of download and installation When all update tasks are finished the results o
89. LD TOOL E 5 7 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build standard output and standard error from the external build tool used that displayed on the Output panel as a text file Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box will open Figure E 35 Save As Dialog Box Seven Oo gt amp My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 95 My Computer a File name Output Build Tool txt y My Network ave as type Text File Exch yt In the dialog box specify a text file name to be saved and the location in which the file is saved and then click the Save button R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 260 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This section describes the Python Console and Python functions provided by CubeSuite F 1 Overview The Python Console plug in is a console tool using the IronPython language In addition to the functions and control statements supported by the IronPython language you can also use Cubesuite Python functions added in order to control CubeSuite The functions provided by CubeSuite are shown below On the Python Console panel you can execute IronPython functions and control statements and CubeSuite Python functions see F 3 CubeSuite Python Functions and
90. R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 329 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Where This function displays a stack backtrace Specification format debugger Where Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function displays a stack backtrace Caution If Information below might be inaccurate is displayed then the information displayed below may not be reliable 78KOR Example of use gt gt gt debugger Where 1 test2 c sub2 int 1 13 Information below might be inaccurate 2 func c func register int 1 34 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 330 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Whereami This function displays a location Specification format debugger Whereami address Argumeni s address Specify the address of the location to display Return value None Detailed description This function displays the location at the address specified by address The location is normally displayed in the following format file name tfunction name at file name line number However if the function or line number at that address is not found then the location is displayed in the following format If the symbol is not found then the location is displayed in the following for
91. R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 54 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark The result that a CX project is created by reusing a CA850 project the versions of the IDE and compiler package and conversion information of options is output to a file as project divert information The project divert information file name is ProjectDivertInformationn txt n 2 to 100 nis not added normally It is added if the file to be created already exist The project divert information file is output for each created project Subproject The project divert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project divert information file is added to the File node of the project Subproject on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project divert information file is shown below 1 Time and date on which a project was created 2 lt CubeSuite IDE Integrated Development Environment Framework version gt CubeSuite IDE Version of IDE of CA850 project gt Version of IDE of CX project 3 lt Compiler package version gt CA850 Version gt CX Version 4 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Command name Tab name of build tool property Option 5 lt Options to change Build mode gt Command name Tab name of build tool property Option of CA850 project gt Option of CX project Time and date on which a project was created The time an
92. Renames the selected build mode Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dia log box Caution When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Remarks 1 Up to 127 characters can be specified as a build mode name When the input violates any restric tion the following messages are shown in the tooltip A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 char acters The build mode name is invalid The following Invalid build mode name is entered The charac characters cannot be used lt gt ters lt gt cannot be used because the build mode name is used for the folder name 2 Upto 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip The maximum number of build modes that can be The number of build modes exceed 20 set per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 149 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subprojec
93. SFR Specification format debugger Register SetValue regName value Argumeni s regName Specify the register name to set value Specify the value to set Return value None Detailed description This function sets the value specified by value in the register specified by regName Example of use gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x100 gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue p01 RB1 0x20 gt gt gt debugger Register SetValue pc 0x200 gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x200 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 313 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Reset This function resets the CPU Specification format debugger Reset Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function resets the CPU Example of use gt gt gt debugger Reset gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 314 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger ReturnOut This function runs until control returns to the program that called the current function Specification format debugger ReturnOut Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function runs until control returns to the program that called the current function Example of us
94. Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area This area displays the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Set the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode 2 Build mode list area This area displays all build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected The build mode that exists only in part of the main project and subproject is shown with the mark Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always displayed at the top R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 148 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens And the build mode is duplicated with the name entered in the dialog box and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently opening project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild will be duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted Rename
95. Suite Python functions see F 3 CubeSuite Python Functions added for controlling CubeSuite via command input method Select Python Console from the View menu The Python Console panel opens You can control CubeSuite and the debugging tool by executing Python functions and control statements in the panel Figure 2 72 Python Console Panel PythonConsole gt gt gt dehugqger DPehbugTool change DebugTool Simulator gt gt gt dehugqger DehbugTool GetType i Simulator gt gt gt dehuqger connect i a Remark See APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS for details about the Python console and Python functions R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 68 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Manipulate CubeSuite on the Command Line You can launch CubeSuite from the command line e g the Windows command prompt and control it via command input without displaying the Main window This section describes the control of CubeSuite when launched from the Windows command prompt From the command prompt execute CubeSuite exe or Cube SuiteW exe located in the CubeSuite installation folder 1 When executing CubeSuite exe If you execute CubeSuite exe you can launch CubeSuite load plugins and execute builds without displaying the Main window The format to specify on the command line is shown below CubeSuite exeA bb br bcb bcA build mode name A npAplug in name pl
96. UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 302 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Jump File debugger Jump Address This function displays each panel Specification format debugger Jump File fileName lineNumber 1 debugger Jump Address jumpType adddress 0 Argumeni s Specify the name of the file to display Specify the line to display default 1 jumpType Specify the type of panel to display The panel types that can be specified are shown below Return value None Detailed description debugger Jump File displays the file specified by fileName in the Editor Panel If ineNumber is specified then the line specified by ineNumber in the file specified by fileName is displayed debugger Jump Address displays the panel specified by jump Type If address is specified then the area corresponding to the specified address is displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger Jump File testJump c gt gt gt debugger Jump File testJump h 25 gt gt gt debugger Jump Address JumpType Memory 0x2000 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 303 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Map Clear This function clears the mapping settings Specification format debugger Map Clear Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed descri
97. X A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Exit Closes this window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 235 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY APPENDIX B GLOSSARY This section defines terms used in the CubeSuite manual 1 Node This refers to an element representing a branch or leaf on a tree view connected with lines to show a hierarchy in the Project Tree panel and other views Figure B 72 Project Tree Panel Project Tree x sample Project JPE uPD70F3746 Microcontroller Es A Pin Configurator Design Tool a Code Generator Design Tool A CAS50 Build Tool cee WESO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program 4nalyzer Analyze Tool J OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool 4 a File E sub Subproject JBE UPD70F3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool H Code Generator Design Tool 4 CA850 Build Tool cee V85O Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool pE OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool a File 2 List control This displays a widget such as in the panel settings areas Click the to display a list of available selections 3 Context menu This refers to the menu that appears when you right click in a window over an icon or other object on the screen The menu displays a list of operations currently available for the object you clicked Figure B 73 Sample Context Menu Copy Ctrl C Rename Property
98. X A WINDOW REFERENCE Present Project Main Project Information This shows the absolute path of the project file the absolute InformationNte 2 Subproject Information path including the cspj file name for main projects and the absolute path including the cssp file name for subprojects Microcontroller Information The following item to the specified microcontroller information Device name Device file name List of version Note 3 Build Tool Information The following out of the set build tool plug in information Build tool name Version of the build tool plug in Version of the compiler package to useN 1 Debug Tool Information The following out of the set debug tool plug in information if the debug tool is not set hide Connected debug tool name Version of the debug tool plug in Version of the debug tool control program The Error Information Which Occurred e 4 Detailed information on the occurred error information Notes 1 This is not shown when the information does not exist 2 This is only shown when projects are opened when there is subproject line them up 3 These are not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project 4 This is only shown when this dialog box is opened by the Contact Information For The Tool Support Center button in Message dialog box Edit menu Contact Information for Technical Support dialog box dedicated items Copies the selected characters i
99. a list of valid and registered licenses 3 License Information area When a license is selected in the License area this area displays details about the selected license R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 92 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Deletes the selected license Close Closes the License Manager R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 93 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the start up window that opens when CubeSuite is launched In this window you can control the user program execution and open panels Figure A 14 Main Window 3 CubeSuite Start 2 cE NB Se ee Sy Sy Gy Oy a OLOLLO oz GZ Cs sta CubeSuite About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite The tutorial contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite TOI A new project can be created 4 new project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing project EXISUNg rrojer t Loads the project of Cubesuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Nothing Nothing Existing PM Project The PM projects for 78KOR 78K0 850 of PM version 6 00 and later can be loaded directly The loaded projects are converted to a project for CubeSuite for each project group and new project files are created in the
100. am Analyzer Displays the message output from the analyze tool Find References Displays a list of locations of references to functions variables output by the ana lyze tool Flash Programming Tool Displays the message output from the flash programming tool Displays the message output from the flash programming tool message output from the flash programming tool Search and Replace Displays the Whole Search result with the Search and Replace dialog box All Messages Shows all the messages above by order of output Caution Tab is not automatically switched when a new message is output on the non selected tab If this is the case is added to the tab informing a new message is output R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 139 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Output Save tab name Save Output tab name As Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save of log When this menu is selected for the first time after launching the program the operation is equivalent to when selecting Save tab name As Note that this operation is invalid while building Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the designated text fil
101. an only be saved in bit map format Bitmap bmp Bitmap format f In the Function List panel The following file types file type are displayed Text files txt Text format CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV format Microsoft Office Excel Workbook xls Microsoft Excel 97 Excel 2003 and 5 0 95 book xls for mat CubeSuite Function List File csfl File format for importing function information g In the Variable List panel The following file types file type are displayed CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV format Microsoft Office Excel Workbook xls Microsoft Excel 97 Excel 2003 and 5 0 95 book xls for mat CubeSuite Variable List File csvl File format for importing variable information R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 226 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE h In the Analysis Chart panel The following file types file type are displayed CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV format Microsoft Office Excel Workbook xls Microsoft Excel 97 Excel 2003 and 5 0 95 book xls for mat JPEG Files jpg JPEG format PNG Files png PNG format Function buttons Saves the file as the designated file name R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 227 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executabl
102. and the caret position max 100 times Redo Cancels the previous Undo operation on the Editor panel and restores the characters and the caret position Cue Cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Paste Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position When the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters the operation is invalid Delete Deletes one character at the caret position When there is a selection area all the characters in the area are deleted Select All Selects all the characters from the beginning to the end in the currently editing text file Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Quick Search tab target When there is a selection area search is only taken place in the selection area Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Quick Replace tab target When there is a selection area replace is only taken place in the selection area Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the designated line R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 136 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Characters area Line number area Jump To Function Jumps to the function regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret posi Note tion as a function
103. ands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see E 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed Remark _ lf there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a rebuild then all these files are saved 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Click the button on the toolbar Remarks 1 Rebuilds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are rebuilt in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location 2 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then rebuilds will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite Build 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Figure E 30 Rebuild active project Item a Uh eM Pin Configurator Desi a Mone Build Tool ee W850 Simulator Debug GE OB Programmer Flash h Open Folder with Explorer 3 File 7 f Download files is ai Remove Form Project t Shift Del Rename Property E 5 3 Run a clean The command specified with the Commands executed in the proje
104. ar Font Color by Update Reserved word J 1 a Comment User Information Control code Background Color Highlight Changed value Edit value General Font and Color Use default background color Reset Selected ltem Colors Display example 2 ABCD abcd 0123 Font settings for text editor 7 Initialize Settings Function buttons Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Color options area Use this area to configure the colors a Setting place area Select a location from the list for which the color will be specified The relationships between the list items and default color settings are as follows R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 178 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Default AaBbttec Black The standard display color in all windows and panels Background color P Warning Aahher Warning messages are displayed in this color in the Output panel and file names Background color Default color P P ae with warnings are displayed in this color in the Project Tree panel Error Sabbce Fontcolor Red Error messages are displayed in this color in the Output panel and file names Background color LightGray wre with errors are displayed in this color in the Project Tree panel Rese
105. as a Subproject When developing the same application system for different microcontrollers create the projects that differ for the microcontroller as subprojects When subprojects are added this manual call the project the main project as opposed to its subprojects Project is a common term for the main project and subprojects Figure 2 41 Project Tree Panel When Subprojects Added Project Tree BET samole Proiect JFE uPDOFS746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool H Code Generator Design Tool A Ca850 Build Tool Main project ce V85O Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool r QB Frogrammer Flash Programming Tool 4 9 File E sub Subproject JPE uPDVOF3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool PH Code Generator Design Tool Project A CA850 Build Tool Subproject cee Y85O Simulator Debug Tool ey Program 4nalyzer Analyze Tool pE OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool a l File Lz subz Subproject ME uPDFOF S746 Microcontroller Pin Configurator Design Tool E F Code Generator Design Tool A CASSO Build Tool Subproject ee V8SO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer 4nalyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool a Fie In addition project settings and the settings for subprojects added to a project are independent and have no effect on each other When making the same settings between the main project and su
106. at debugger Download HexBank fileName offset 0 append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only filename and offset Return value None Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads hex files in memory bank format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download HexBank testModule hex gt gt gt debugger Download HexBank testModule2 hex 0x1000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 289 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download HexldTag This function downloads a hex file with ID tag Specification format debugger Download HexIdTag fileName offset 0 append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only filename and offset
107. ator Design Tool ol oyster External Bus Port INT serial 4 0 DA Timer Watchdog Timer RTO Glock Output Buzzer Output DMA LWI 4 C4850 Build Tool ee 850 Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool APEC ECEEECE a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool 5 3 File ral Build tool generated Files out sample out hex sample hex H s Startup s start s e main c E sub Subproject ME UPOFORS746 Microcontroller H A Pin Configurator Design Tool FY Code Generator Design Tool A C4850 Build Tool chs V8SO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer nalyze Tool J OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool m l File On the project tree project components are displayed as the nodes below in a tree view If you select each component node or file its detailed information properties is displayed in the Property pane and you can change its settings R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 39 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS You can also make project settings from the context menu for each component node or file R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 Project name Project Hereafter referred to as Project node Microcontroller name Microcontroller Hereafter referred to as Microcontroller node Design Tool name Design Tool Hereafter referred to as Design Tool node Build tool name Build tool Hereafter referred to as Build Tool no
108. ault e Open file before replacing This item is disabled Function buttons Switches between display nide the Option area in hie tb Search Searches characters with designated criteria in batch and shows the search results in list in the Output panel Cancel Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box setting and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 161 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Replace tab In this tab search is done with the designated characters and then they are replaced to the characters to be replaced Note that this tab will be disabled if you call the Search and Replace dialog box from a panel other than the Editor panel Figure A 37 Search and Replace Dialog Box Quick Replace Tab Search and Replace 1 Search text abc 2 Replace with 3 Search location Current panel main c Option earch criteria Plain text Gase sensitive Word by word Open file before reslacine Function buttons Opti search Forward Replace anc Forward The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Search From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Searc
109. ave the build mode R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 251 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuila 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode a When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target debug dedicated project on the project tree and select the build mode to be changed to with the Build mode property in the Build Mode category on the Build Options tab in the Property panel Figure E 23 Build mode Property b When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure E 24 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Build odes Apply to All Build mode list Default uild Buildk odes E Select the build mode to be changed from Build mode list The selected build mode will be displayed in Selected build mode Click the Apply to All button The build mode for the main project and all the subprojects including projects other than a debug dedicated project which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in th
110. avied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 http www renesas com 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 0 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT0256EJ0100
111. beSuite Programming for information about flash programming h Tool The Tool menu displays tool related menu commands Options for Product name Opens the Option dialog box for Product name Opens the User Setng dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 100 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE i Window Window menu shows menu items to operate the window Divide Panel Divides the active Editor panel horizontally Only the active Editor panel can be divide Other panels will not be divide A panel can be divide a maximum of two times j Help The Help menu displays help related menu commands Help for Product name Opens the help for product name Open Help for Target Opens the help corresponding to the window panel dialog box error message or other object that currently has focus One Point Advice Opens the One Point Advice dialog box Opens the help for product name Browse Renesas Electronics Opens our microcontroller website in the web browser Microcontrollers Web Contact Info for Tech support Shows the Contact Information for Technical Support dialog box Center Check for Updates Opens the CubeSuite Update Manager window and begin checking for updates About Product name Opens the Version Information dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 101 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
112. bprojects or between differing subprojects select multiple nodes to set on the project tree and make the settings with the Property panel Caution A subproject cannot be added to another subproject Remark See 2 6 3 Add anew subproject and 2 7 2 Add an existing subproject for how to add subprojects R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 41 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 1 Start a project On the tool bar click Gi Start to open the Start panel You can click the buttons on the panel to create a new project or open an existing one Note that the Start panel opens automatically the first time that CubeSuite starts Figure 2 42 Start Panel eo CubeSuite Learn About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite The tutonal contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite pw project can be created A n w project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing project Open Existing Project Loads the project E L I Cenisrike mrorcks SO fE DFOMCEs I Nothing a e P projects for F8K0RA TSROAM ABO of Phl version 6 00 and later can be loaded directly The loaded projects are converted to a proj ct for CubeSuite for each project group and new project files are created in the orginal project folder Open Sample Project Many sample projects that can be built immediately are pr
113. bugger Breakpoint Enable breakNumber Argumeni s Specify the break event number to enable Return value None Detailed description This function enables the break event specified by breakNumber If breakNumber is not specified then breaks of all break event numbers will be enabled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Enable 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Disable 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Delete 1 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 276 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Information This function displays break point information Specification format debugger Breakpoint Information Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function displays the break point settings in the following format break event number break name state address location Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Information 1 Break 0001 Disable test c Test Init 32 3 Break 0003 Enable test c Test_Init 10 4 Break 0004 Disable test c Test Init 44 5 Break 0005 Enable disp c Test Init 12 7 Break 0007 Enable disp c Test Init 44 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 277 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Set This function configures a break poi
114. ce data for the number of frames specified by frameCount If fileName is specified then the trace data is written to the file If append is set to True then the trace data is appended to the file Example of use gt gt gt debugger XTrace Dump 3 004086 004087 4 jarl XO Test Init 1p 004088 2 br XO Test Init 0x9c gt gt gt debugger XTrace Dump 10 TestTrace txt gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 339 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS BreakCondition This class creates a break condition Specification format class BreakCondition Address Data None AccessSize None BreakType BreakType Hardware Argumeni s Address Specify the address at which to set a break Must be specified Data Specify the number to set as a break condition for the data If None is specified then the data condition is ignored AccessSize Specify the access size 8 16 or 32 If None is specified then all access sizes will be specified BreakType Specify the break type The break types that can be specified are shown below BreakType Software Software break except a simulator BreakType Hardware Hardware break default BreakType Read Data read break BreakType Write Data write break BreakType Access Data access break Detailed description BreakCondition is in class format and the break condition is
115. change the settings of an external tool that has already been registered select the name of the external tool to modify and edit the desired setting The order of the items on this list is the same as the order in the menu b Buttons New Adds the item New External Tool to the bottom of the list for the registration of a new external tool Note that this button will be disabled if 8 external tools have already been registered Delete Removes the external tool that is selected in the list Moves the external tool selected in the list up one row Moves the external tool selected in the list down one row 2 New registration area Use this area to configure the details of a newly added external tool Up to 8 external tools can be registered a Menu name Specify the name to use in the menu for launching the external tool up to 100 characters The name specified here will appear in the Tool menu selecting that item will launch the external tool When you finish entering the menu name the text box loses focus the name automatically replaces the New External Tool string in the list b Command path Either type in the name of the executable file including absolute path for the new external tool directly via the keyboard up to 259 characters or click the button and in the Select Program dialog box specify the name of the executable file Startup folder is automatically set to the absolute path to the fo
116. checking function This function performs the check for updates when a CubeSuite project is opened This function is executed when in the Option dialog box in the General Update category the Check for updates when opening project checkbox is selected and the conditions set in Check at intervals of are met Figure 2 26 Option Dialog Box General Update Category S General 5 L 1 General Update Startup and Exit Display Test Editor Check for updates when opening project Font and Color External Tools Check at intervals of Days Build Debug Update Manager Option cy Update Others User Information hitialze All Settings me Remarks 1 This function performs the check for updates in parallel with the CubeSuite process While the check is ongoing the i icon appears in the Task Tray 2 If the check does not find any updates the auto checking function exits 2 Auto download function The auto download function checks if the conditions for updating in 1 are met and then downloads any updates that were found This function is executed for each category when in the Update Manager Options dialog box Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished is selected R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 30 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 27 Update Manager Options Dialog Box Update Manager Options
117. codes including a blank symbol Colors of reserved words and comments R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 135 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu only available for the Editor panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Close file name Closes the currently editing the Editor panel When the contents of the panel have not been saved a confirmation message is shown Save file name Overwrites the contents of the currently editing the Editor panel Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same opera tion is applied as the selection in Save file name As file name Save Settings This dialog box is used to open the Save Settings dialog box to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on this panel Save file name As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of the currently editing the Edi tor panel Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box of Windows Print Opens the Print dialog box of Windows for printing the contents of the currently editing the Editor panel Edit menu only available for the Editor panel The following items are exclusive for the Edit menu in the Editor panel other items are all invalid Undo Cancels the previous operation on the Editor panel and restores the characters
118. cription of each area 1 Microcontroller Select the microcontroller type to use in the project You can select the item below V850 78KOR 78K0 2 Using microcontroller area a List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller to use in the project The microcontrollers that correspond to the microcontroller type selected in Microcontroller are listed and cat egorized by their nicknames The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name Internal ROM size K bytes Internal RAM size K bytes b Button Update Displays the CubeSuite Update Manager window You can use the CubeSuite Update Manager window to check for microcontroller information updates via the network This button becomes enabled if you register the license of CubeSuite Remark When the microcontroller to be used does not appear in the list you can search for the microcontroller via the net work with the CubeSuite Update Manager window which is opened by clicking the Update button Note that the Update button is invalid if you have not registered the license of CubeSuite R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 107 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Kind of project Select the project type to create on Kind of project You can select the item below Application CA850 CX CA78K0 CA78KOR Select
119. ct To close a project select the File or Project menu gt gt Close Project Figure 2 68 Close Project Item Create Mew Project Open Project Favorites Projects Add Seb sample as Active Project Close Project F Save Project Ctrl ShiFk 5 ee Save Project 4s Remove from Project shift Del Save Project and CubeSuite as Package When the open project or changed files are not saved a Message dialog box is displayed Figure 2 69 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 701001 Ph Project has been changed Save r Click the Yes button to save click the No button to not save R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 64 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Changing the Window Layout This section describes how to change the CubeSuite window layout 2 9 1 Automatically hide panels Panels support the auto hide feature When the auto hide feature is in use unused panels are minimized on the edge of the frame making it possible to dis play more information at one time 1 Enabling the auto hide feature To enable the auto hide feature click on the panel to hide to select it Right click on the panel s title bar and select Auto hide or click on the panel s title bar EJ When an auto hidden panel loses the focus a minimized icon and its panel name appear on the edge of the frame as a tab To display the auto hidden panel move the mouse cursor over the tab Th
120. ct You can directly open the most recently used projects from the most recent to the fourth most recent from the menu From the File menu select Recent Projects the path of the recently used projects will display in a cascading menu in order from most recent to fourth most recent Select the project you wish to open R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 48 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 49 Recent Projects Item Recent Projects 1D workisamplet4 sample04 cspj E 2 Di workisampletSsample03 cspj E 3 Dworkisampled2 samplede cspj LA 4 Oiworkisample sample cspj 3 Open a project from the favorites menu Open a project registered on the favorites menu From the Project menu select Favorites Projects the path of the projects registered on the favorites menu is displayed as a cascading menu Select the project you wish to open Figure 2 50 Favorites Projects Item F Favorite Projects ie T i D workisampletsample cspi res 215 Fi 214 ac afi E 1 Register to Favorite Project of Register to Favorite Project E a Register to Favorite Project A 4 Register to Favorite Project 2 7 2 Add an existing subproject Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Add gt gt Add Subproject on the context menu the Add Existing Subproject dialog box will open Figure 2 51 Add Existing Subproject Dialog Box Add Existing Subpro
121. ct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 6 Restoring hidden updates In the menu area of the CubeSuite Update Manager window select Restore hidden updates to display the Restore hidden updates page From this page you can display the updates that were hidden on the Select updates page Figure 2 35 Restore hidden updates Page th CubeSuite Update Manager A Efx NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates E All Restore hidden updates 5 D T8KROR KG3 ia uPD78F1166_A0 You can restore hidden updates and then check again to see which updates you still need Update Dewrload and install Download only O O CubeSuite Vx zx Dewrload size mor EB Option Rewew update history This is update for CubeSutte Restore hidden updates on l O GO CubeSute Update Manager Vx xx ees Download size xxx EB ee This is update for Cubesutte Update Manager Exit NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 10xx a Select updates Select the check boxes of updates in the Restore hidden updates page and click the Restore button Figure 2 36 Restore hidden updates Page Restore hidden updates You can restore hidden updates and then check agan to see which updates you still need CubeSutte VEREK Download size mx EE This is update for CubeSutte O G CubeSutte Update Manager Vx ax Download size za EB This is update for CubeSute Update Manager R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 36 of 353 Oct 01
122. ct Name uPD OF S746 AWE PD OF 3745 1 44pin Internal ROM size K bytes 1024 UPD FOF 3746 1 44pin Internal RAM size bytes 67 440 E W YO50ES HES Ce te VE50ES HF3 Ce te VE50ES HG3 Ce ty WE50ES HIS ti WE50ES AIG3 H Eind of project Application C4850 wt Place C Documents and Settings4My Documents w Make the project folder C Documents and SettingssMy Documents samplesample cepi C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project When you click the Create button the project file is created in the location specified in 4 and the structure of the cre ated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel Figure 2 45 Project Tree Panel After Creating a New Project Project Tree 4 C4850 Build Tool ce WESO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program 4nalyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool ae File Remark After creating a project you must add target files to the project in order to perform building or debugging For details on how to add these files see the following When Application or Library is selected on Kind of project gt See the CubeSuite Build When Debug Only is selected on Kind of project gt See E 3 Add a File to a Project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 45 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 3 Add a new subproject Select the Project node on the project tree and if you
123. ct cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 2 Setting the command when running a clean This allows you to delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see E 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 256 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 1 When running a clean of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Select Clean Project from the Build menu Figure E 31 Clean Project Item Build Ep Build Project F7 fe Rebuild Project Shift F7 CE Rapid Build El Build SubProject Cebugonly il Rebuild SubProject_ DebugOnly LA Clean SubProject_DebugOnly F is Ti Build Mode Settings Tl Batch Build Ly Build Gption List Remarks 1 Cleans are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are cleaned in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location 2 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then cleans will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSui
124. d Build When preserving an edited source file when the rapid build was made effective a build begins a build and is performed concurrently with edit When doing a rapid build Tl recommend to preserve it briskly by Gtr 5 after edit of one file Observe registered files changing Enable Break Sound nitialize Settings __Apply Enables the rapid build N feature default oOo Does not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files For details on the rapid build feature see the following When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project CubeSuite Build When the target project type is a debug dedicated project E 5 4 Runa rapid build R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 187 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing Start s a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like Does not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected
125. d date on which a CX project was created by reusing a CA850 project is output using for mat dddd mmmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM CubeSuite IDE Integrated Development Environment Framework version The version of IDE of a CA850 project and the version of IDE of a CX project are output Compiler package version The compiler package used in a CA850 project and the version and the compiler package used ina CX project and the version are output The version of CX is the latest version in the compiler packages which are installed in the CubeSuite environment R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 55 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a CA850 project and is not used in a CX project exists the informa tion is output for each build mode in the format shown below Command name Tab name of build tool property Option This item is output only when the corresponding option exists CA850 options are converted into CX options which have the same function The option that has the same function and different name is not output Build modes are output in the following order DefaultBuild user created build mode DefaultBuild is the build mode that CubeSuite provides by default See CubeSuite Build for detail about a build mode Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a CA850 project and has
126. dded Favorite Project is shown 3 Favorites Projects Selects Favorites Projects gt gt 3 Register Favorites Project to open the added project If no project is added Favorite Project is shown 4 Favorites Projects Selects Favorites Projects gt gt 4 Register Favorites Project to open the added project If no project is added Favorite Project is shown Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to a project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to a project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file exten sion Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Project Active Project Sets the selected project or subproject to an active project Close Project Closes the current project Changes the current project or file to the new one If they have not saved con firm the user whether to save them
127. dded to the file name After conversion the build mode will have the same name as that of a PM project Any characters that are not allowed in a CubeSuite folder name however 2 lt gt will be replaced by underscores _ If there is another build mode with the same name after conversion then the _n_ n 1 2 will be appended to the build mode name The following PM and build tool versions are supported for conversion PM V6 30 and CC78KO V4 00 RA78KO V4 00 or higher 78KO PM V6 20 and CC78KOR V1 00 RA78KOR V1 00 or higher 78KOR and PM V6 00 and CA850 V3 00 or higher V850 The latest version of the compiler pack age installed on your computer is set as the version of your build tool The result that a PM project is converted into a CubeSuite project is output to a file as project convert information The project convert information file name is ProjectConvertInformation_projectname txt The project convert information file is output for each converted project Subproject The project convert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project convert information file is displayed the File node of the project Subproject on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project convert information file is shown below 1 Time and date on which a project was converted 2 lt IDE version gt CubeSuite IDE Version 3 lt Compiler pac
128. de Debug tool name Debug Tool Hereafter referred to as Debug Tool node Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Hereafter referred to as Analyze Tool node QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Hereafter referred to as Flash Programming Tool node File Hereafter referred to as File node Download files Hereafter referred to as Download files node Build tool generated files Hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node Startup Hereafter referred to as Startup node Category name Hereafter referred to as Category node Subproject name Subproject Hereafter referred to as Subproject node The project s name The microcontroller used in the project The design tool pin configurator code generator etc used Note that Code Generator Design Tool node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project The build tool compiler assembler etc used Note When the project type is a debug dedicated project None is shown as build tool name The debug tool in circuit emulator simulator etc used The analyze tool used Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug Note dedicated project The flash programming tool used Files registered to the project are displayed directly below the File node This is a node for adding download files to the project Note that this node is shown only when the project type
129. ded by Windows in order to print the contents of the active Editor panel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 95 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Recent Projects Displays a list of recently used projects in a cascading menu to open those projects Exit Exits the application If there are unsaved source files or main or subproject files then a Message dialog box will ask if you want to save them b Edit The Edit menu displays editing related menu commands Opens the Search and Replace dialog box or the Trace Search dialog box if the Trace panel has focus or the Memory Search dialog box if the Memory panel has focus and perform the specified search Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box and replace the specified string with another string Opens the Go to the Location dialog box and move to the specified location c View The View menu displays panel and other view related menu commands Project Tree Shows the Project Tree panel and move the focus to it Property Shows the Property panel and move the focus to it The property selected in the Project Tree panel is shown Output Shows the Output panel and move the focus to it Debug Manager Shows the Debug Manager panel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 96 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Watch Displays a cascading menu for opening a Watc
130. der is different from that of the source project the following message dialog box will appear if you click the Create button To continue the process click the Yes button Figure 2 58 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 2627001 CubeSuite recommends that creating project at the same place as the original project folder Are you sure You want to change the project folder Selected folder O work sample sample_C Recommended folder diverted project folder O worksample Build eror may be occured in the creating project Because the folder for a creating project is different from the original Click the Create button The Source Convert Setting dialog box CX appears Figure 2 59 Source Convert Setting Dialog Box Source Convert Setting You can convert the project composition files like source files for the build tool of the new project Do vou really want to convert source files Original source files are overwritten by conversion Backup of project before conversion Backup the project composition files before conversion Place O work samplessample_backup Select Yes to perform conversion on the source files To save a backup of the entire project including source files select the Backup the project composition files before conversion check box and specify a location in which to save the backup Click the OK button to convert the source files and create the CX project
131. dialog box is used to display how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress Is done Figure A 39 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open The dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message Display Area Displays the message output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes this dialog box Note that if the process termination is impossible this button is disabled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 168 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 40 Option Dialog Box ext Editor Font and Color External Tools Build Debug Tis User Information iii gt Function butto
132. dicates all the items in the category are expanded The H mark indicates all the items are shrinked You can expand shrink the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name If the mark is displayed only the hex number is allowed in the text box Please see the information on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents 3 Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and their contents selected in the Detailed information display change area is shown 4 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed when a tab is selected In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section explaining each tab for the details on the contents of the display or the method of the setting on the tab a Project node is selected in Project Tree panel Project node Project tab Subproject node Subproject tab Microcontroller node Microcontroller Information tab Design Tool node Pin Configurator Information tab Top View Setting tab Generation tab Macro Setting tab See the CubeSuite Design for details about this tab Build Tool node Common Options tab Note Except for a debug dedicated project Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab Object Convert Options tab CA78K0 CA78KOR Create Library Options tab CA78KO CA78KOR CX Variables Fu
133. do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that the project has Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to the designated location R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 73 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Search and Replace dialog box This dialog box is used to search and replace the designated characters Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to display how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment User Setting dialog box This dialog box allows you to customize toolbars and menus displayed in the Main window New Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new toolbar to appear in the Main win dow Rename Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the name of a toolbar created by the user Customize Keyboard dialog box This dialog box is used to assign shortcut keys to the various commands Rearrange Commands dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the arrangement including addition and deletion of menu items and buttons in the Main window Version Information dialog b
134. e gt gt gt debugger ReturnOut gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 315 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Run This function resets and then run the program Specification format debugger Run runOption RunOption Normal Argumeni s runOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description RunOption WaitBreak Wait until program stops RunOption Normal Breakpoints enabled do not wait until program stops default Return value None Detailed description This function resets and then run the program If RunOption WaitBreak is specified in runOption then it will wait until the program stops Example of use gt gt gt debugger Run gt gt gt debugger Run RunOption WaitBreak R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 316 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Step This function performs step execution Specification format debugger Step stepOption StepOption Source Argumeni s stepOption Specify the execution unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description StepOption Source Source line unit default StepOption Instruction Instruction unit Return value None Detailed description This function performs step execution If a function call is bei
135. e txt see c Save of log Note that this operation is invalid while user program is executed Edit menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copies the selected characters to the clip board Select All Selects all the messages displayed on the panel Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Quick Search tab target Replace Context menu Copy Select All Clear Tag Jump Help for Message Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Whole Replace tab target Copies the selected characters to the clip board Selects all the messages displayed on the panel Deletes all the messages displayed on the panel Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column Displays the help with regard to the displayed message or the message at the current caret Note that the help is only for warning error messages R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 140 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 26 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C ource file c Header file Az inc Assemble file asm s Text file bet All files Function buttons The following items are explained here How to ope
136. e testVal 128 gt gt gt debugger Watch GetValue testVal WatchOption Hexdecimal 0x80 gt gt gt debugger Watch GetValue testVal WatchOption Binary 0b10000000 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 328 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Watch SetValue This function sets a variable value Specification format debugger Watch SetValue variableName value Argumeni s variableName Specify the variable name register name or I O register name SFR register name to set value Specify the value to set Return value None Detailed description This function sets the value specified by value in the variable register or I O register SFR register specified by variableName Example of use gt gt gt debugger 128 gt gt gt debugger 0x80 gt gt gt debugger 0b10000000 gt gt gt debugger gt gt gt debugger 100 gt gt gt debugger 0x64 gt gt gt debugger 0b1100100 gt gt gt debugger gt gt gt debugger 0x256 GetValue testVal GetValue testVal GetValue testVal SetValue testVal GetValue testVal GetValue testVal GetValue testVal set Value testVal GetValue testVal WatchOption Hexdecimal WatchOption Binary 100 WatchOption Hexdecimal WatchOption Binary 0x256 WatchOption Hexdecimal
137. e the Output folder for assemble list and the Output folder for frequency information file of the Output File category The Individual Assemble Options tab CA850 The Output folder for assemble list file of the Assemble List category The Dump Options tab CA850 The Output folder of the Output File category Compile Options tab CX The Output folder for assembler source file of the Output File category The Output folder for assemble list file of the Assemble List category Link Options tab CX The Output folder of the Output File category The Output folder for link map file of the Link Map category The Output folder for symbol information file of the Symbol Information category Hex Output Options tab CX The Output folder for hex file of the Output File category Create Library Options tab CX The Output folder of the Output File category R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 220 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Compile Options tab CX The Output folder for assembler source file of the Output File category The Output folder for assemble list file of the Assemble List category The Generation tab the Output folder Click the Copy button in the History page in the CubeSuite Update Manager window Description of each area 1 Message area Shows messages related to folders selec
138. e Output folder for replacement information file the Output folder for object information file and the Output folder for reference information file of the Output File category The Variables Functions Relocation Options tab CA78KOR The Output folder for variables functions information file of the Output File category The Compile Options tab CA850 The Output folder for assembly file the Output folder for assemble list and the Output folder for frequency information file of the Output File category The Assemble Options tab CA850 The Output folder for assemble list file of the Assemble List category The Link Options tab CA850 The Output folder of the Output File category The Output folder for link map file of the Link Map category The ROMization Process Options tab CA850 The Output folder for ROMized object file of the Output File category The Output folder for ROMization section file of the Section List category The Output folder for memory map file of the Memory Map category The Hex Convert Options tab CA850 The Output folder for hex file of the Output File category The Archive Options tab CA850 The Output folder of the Output File category The Section File Generate Options tab CA850 The Output folder for section file of the Output File category The Individual Compile Options tab CA850 The Output folder for assembly fil
139. e As dialog box 224 Save Project As dialog box 222 Save Settings dialog box 153 save the project file 60 Search and Replace dialog box 155 Quick Replace tab 162 Quick Search tab 156 Whole Replace tab 165 Whole Search tab 159 Select External Text Editor dialog box 230 Select Program dialog box 228 Select updates page 77 Source Convert Setting dialog box 111 Start panel 104 Subproject tab 128 Subproject 41 T tag jump 139 Task Tray 91 Text Edit dialog box 146 Toolbars tab 195 U Update in progress dialog box 88 Update Manager Options dialog box 89 User Setting dialog box 193 Commands tab 197 Toolbars tab 195 V Version Information dialog box 207 W Whole Replace tab 165 Whole Search tab 159 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 349 of 353 Revision Record Description Rev Oct 01 2010 First Edition issued CubeSuite Ver 1 40 User s Manual Start Publication Date Rev 1 00 Oct 1 2010 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson
140. e c ca s oe t cE de c de c c s s oe ce oe c c c ede ce c de ce de Ce c es de ce de dee dee oe cee dee oe ce ee S 4ieh This device driver was created by Applilet for S50E8 Fx3 a Bek S2 Bit Single Chip Microcontrollers Bok Titt Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation 2002 2008 aye All rights reserved by NEC Electronics Corporation EBETi 10 This program should be used on your own responsibility ijt NEC Electronics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any losses 12k incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of this file 13 ee l4 t Filename main c 1o Abstract This file implements main function 16 ee APIlib Applilet for YO50ES Fx3 2 91 28 Feb 2009 17 EE 1a jee Device UPOFOFS Sr 14 e SUJet Compiler CAG50 2 jak 22 4 Creation date 2008 03 06 23 ak Me E E dc ce i rE de ce ec ce ce rE E es ec oe ee oe ce oe ee de ce oe oe ee de Cee c es de ce oe ee oe ede es dee oe oe ees dee de ce dec de cee es dec ds ec E ese a5 pk E Jt 2 x LUT 3 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Editor panel Edit menu only available for the Editor panel Context menu How to open On the Project Tree panel double click a file On the Project Tree panel select a source file and then select Open from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select a file and
141. e character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor words variable function at the caret position are shown by default 2 Replace with Designate characters to be replaced You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 165 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Search location Designate the location to search Select either one of the following items from the drop down list or directly enter the file location from the keyboard maximum number 10 Current opened files Active project Main project and subprojects Folder Name Searches within all the opening the Editor panel If no file is opened in the Editor panel this item is disabled Searches within the text file included in the active project When File type is specified searches only the specified type Note that is the current project does not exist this item is disabled Searches within the text file included in the main project and subproject When File type is specified searches only the specified type Note that if the current project does not exist this item is disabled Searches within the text file in the folder specified by directly entering the maximum charact
142. e dialog box Caution For subprojects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode of the sub project is duplicated from the contents of its DefaultBuild and then the selected build mode is created newly to the subproject i e the selected build mode with the contents of the subproject is added R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 252 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 4 3 Set the target project for a build When running a build that targets a specific debug dedicated project main project or Subproject you must set that project as the active project To set the active project select the Project node to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu Figure E 25 Set selected project as Active Project Item E SubProject_DebugOnly S i 07031314 Microco El EJ A Pin Configurator Desi re Rebuild Debugonly a Mone Build Tool S gt W850 Simulator Debug IHE QB Programmer Flash h Open Folder with Explorer a Lp File T E ral Download Files Clean Debug nly Set SubProject DebugOnly as Active Project Remove Form Project Shift Del Rename Property When a project is set as the active project that Project node is underlined as follows Figure E 26 Active Project Project Tree E DebugOnly Project Me uPO7031314 Microcontroller E3 A Pi
143. e display updates are shown in this color in the Background color Default color P Memory panel and Watch panel Read or fetch AsAbte Default color Locations that have been read or fetched are displayed in this color in the Trace Background color LightGreen Write Default color Locations that have been written are dis played in this color in the Trace panel Background color Orange R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 179 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE _ and write AabbCe Default color Locations that have been read and writ ten are displayed in this color in the Trace Background color LightSkyBlue Coverage 100 ABHCE Font color Fontcolor color Default color color The line for which code coverage is at 100 is displayed in this color in the Edi tor panel and Disassemble panel Coverage 1 Sabbtie Default color The line for which code coverage is at 1 Background color a 99 to 99 is displayed in this color in the Background color LightPink p ay l Editor panel and Disassemble panel Coverage 0 Sabbce Font color color Default color color The line for which code coverage is at 0 COCON not yet executed is displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassem ble panel Invalid AaBbbctr Fontcolor color Non memory mapped areas in the Mem ory panel and filenames in the Project color Default color Tree panel that do
144. e file of an external tool Figure A 68 Select Program Dialog Box select Program Look in 9 f em My Recent LMy videos Documents G sample My Documents 33 My Computer Files of type Program files exe w Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the General External Tools category of the Option dialog box click the button in the new registration area Description of each area 1 Look in Select the location folder of the executable for the external tool to register from the drop down list 2 List of files This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in and Files of type 3 File name Specify the name of the executable file for the external tool to register R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 228 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type Select the type of the executable file for the external tool to register from the following drop down list Program files exe Executable format default All files All formats Function buttons Species he selocied ile in the Option dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 229 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select External Text Edi
145. e installed Please save it to your PC Adobe Reader is required to view this file Please visit Adobe Systems Incorporated s web site for more information To install CubeSuite on your computer follow the steps below NET Framework 2 0 and Visual C runtime libraries are required to run Cubesuite Please install them beforehand if they are not already installed These runtime libraries are found in Microsoft Download Center o NET Framework For Windows AP please download and install the following For Windows Vista and 7 itis not required Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Service Pack 2 Runtime components of Visual C 2005 SP1 Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 The temporary folder name that includes multi byte characters may cause an error at installation For instance the login name is Japanese 2 CubeSuite Click the button below to start CubeSuite setup application Begin CubeSuite Setup p Install NET Framework 2 0 and the Visual C 2005 SP1 runtime components Click the Begin CubeSuite Setup button CubeSuite setup begins Cautions 1 CubeSuite setup must be conducted with administrator privileges 2 In order to install CubeSuite you must have the NET Framework 2 0 for Windows XP 3 0 for Windows Vista 3 5 1 for Windows 7 and Runtime library of Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Please install these runtime components before installing CubeSuite Each runtime component can b
146. e installed from the Preparing to Install window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 15 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If the page does not appear automatically open Install hta in the CD ROM 2 Confirm the product information etc Product information etc appears Figure 2 2 Initial Window Welcome to the Renesas Electronics Microcontroller development tools setup program CubeSuite Veet xe Meet MME Renesas Electronics Corporation 20e8 20s Mote Please end all Windows programs before executing this setup program Cw CubeSuite Back Newt gt Check the information then click the Next button 3 Confirm the software license agreement The installer asks if you agree to the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Figure 2 3 Software License Agreement Window Installer step 2 8 Software License Agreement Please read the following end user license agreement G3 CubeSuite SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Renesas Electronics Corporation a Japanese corporation having its principal place of business at 1753 Shimonumabe Wakahara ku Kanagawa 211 6666 Japan LICENSOR grants to the Customer LICENSEE the right to use the provided software program Licensed Program pursuant to the following terms and conditions and LICENSEE agrees such terms and conditions E THE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SECTION 1 LICEHSE 1 1 Subject to the terms and conditions
147. e memory Specification format debugger Memory Fill address1 address2 value memoryOption MemoryOption Byte Argumeni s memoryOption Specify the fill unit The units that can be specified are shown below Byte unit 8 bits default Half word unit 16 bits V850 Word unit 78K 16 bits V850 32 bits Return value None Detailed description This function fills from address1 to address2 with value If memoryOption is specified fill according to that specification Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Fill 0x1000 Ox2000 OxFF gt gt gt debugger Memory Fill 0x2000 0x3000 Ox0A MemoryOption Word gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 308 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Read This function fills the memory Specification format debugger Memory Read address memoryOption MemoryOption Byte Argumeni s Specify the address to reference memoryOption Specify the display unit The units that can be specified are shown below MemoryOption Byte Byte unit 8 bits default MemoryOption Halfword Half word unit 16 bits V850 MemoryOption Word Word unit 78K 16 bits V850 32 bits Return value The referenced memory value Detailed description This function displays the address specified by address according to memoryOption in hexadecimal format E
148. e panel opens from the tab and becomes available When the panel loses the focus again the panel will be minimized as the tab 2 Disabling the auto hide feature To disable the auto hide feature click on the panel to hide to select it Right click on the panel s title bar and select Auto hide or click on the panel s title bar E 2 9 2 Floating a window To float a window click on its title bar and move it You can also double click the title bar of the window you wish to float or right click and select Floating Figure 2 70 Context Menu Dockable Hide Panel Anto Hide R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 65 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 3 Docking windows You can dock a floating window to the main window Click and drag the title bar of the window you wish to dock Docking indicators appears automatically in the center top bottom left and right of the main window When the mouse pointer moves over one of the docking indicators part of the window background becomes blue If you release the mouse pointer at this point the window will be docked in the blue area Selecting the indicators allows the window to be placed freely as shown below Left of Places in the left part of the target panel Right of a Places in the right part of the target panel Below Places in the bottom part of the target panel Center of Places in the target panel as a tab
149. e restricted if a license is not registered Update Manager will not be available Below are the maximum code sizes that can be developed 78KO microcontroller 32 Kbytes 78KOR microcontroller 64 Kbytes V850 microcontroller 128 Kbytes The Tool Support Center Contact Information feature will not be available 2 3 1 Show license information When the CubeSuite License Manager window starts valid registered licenses area shown in the Licenses area Figure 2 14 CubeSuite License Manager Window CubeSuite License Manager AS You can add and remove license of CubeSuite and related tools LB License key is case insensitive and does not contain alpabetical SE Add this License key PO Licenses CubeSuite for 796 Standard Edition Remove CubeSuite for 78K Standard Edition License kep He MMH MMMHH HEIMM HEMMBI H MMB Serial number sees R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 23 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 0 2 Add a license In the CubeSuite License Manager window in the Add this License key text box enter a license key then click the Add button to add the license Figure 2 15 CubeSuite License Manager Window CubeSuite License Manager iG You can add and remove license of CubeSuite and related tools License key i case insensittve and does not contain alpabetical a le 2 3 3 Delete a license In the CubeSuite License Manager window se
150. ecified Return value Number without Remark The results of function execution are displayed with a sign added Detailed description This function gets coverage for the function specified by funcName If there are multiple load modules specify progName In the case of a static function specify fileName Example of use gt gt gt debugger XCoverage GetCoverage TestInit Test Out Test c 81 50 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 333 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XRunBreak Delete This function deletes XRunBreak setting information Specification format debugger xXRunBreak Delete Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function deletes XRunBreak setting information Example of use gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None gt gt gt debugger xXRunBreak Set 1 TimeType S True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer 1Second Periodic gt gt gt debugger xXRunBreak Delete gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 334 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XRunBreak Refer This function displays XRunBreak setting information Specification format debugger XRunBreak Refer Argumeni s None Return value
151. ect file name A One or more spaces Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated Each option is described below Start CubeSuite with the Main window displayed in the same manner as when launching it from the Start menu npAplug in name plug Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window without loading the specified plugins in name in the Plugins folder In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which the DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plug in names by separating them with commas You can also specify the np option itself multiple times Each DLL will not be loaded If the plugin specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window without loading any of the specified plug ins in the Plugins folder If an invalid option is specified it will be ignored plug in optionA plug in Specify an option for the plugin see 3 Plug in Options parameter project file name Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window with the specified project file loaded R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 71 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Plug in Options Below are the plug in options that can be specified psAscript file name This is the Python Console plugin option After loading the project file in CubeSuite run the code in scrip
152. ect node or Subproject node Then select Add gt gt Add Subproject in File or Project menu Add Existing Subproject dialog box appears Select subproject files to add Select Add gt gt Add Subproject in the context menu of Project node or Subproject node Add Existing Subproject dialog box appears Select subproject files to add lt 2 gt Add new subproject Select Project node or Subproject node Then select Add gt gt Add New Subproject in File or Project menu Create Project dialog box appears Create a new subproject file Select Add gt gt Add New Subproject in the context menu of Project node or Subproject node Create Project dialog box appears Create a new subproject file c Remove a subproject from a project You can remove a subproject from a project by one of the following procedure Select the subproject that you want to delete then select Remove from Project in Project menu Select the subproject that you want to delete then select Remove from Project in the context menu Caution If the selected subproject is the active project then it cannot be removed from the project d Move subprojects You can move subprojects by the following procedure Drag the subproject you want to move then drop it in the destination Remark You can run multiple CubeSuite and drop the subproject to a different project In this case the dropped subproject is copied not moved R20UT02
153. ectronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Update Manager or from the CubeSuite menu select Help gt gt Check for Updates The CubeSuite Update Manager window launches Figure 2 17 CubeSuite Update Manager Window T Cu beSuite Update Manager a leg NEC ELECTRONICS NEC Select updates Ai amp CubeSuite Update Manager j a k TSKORKG3 na uPD78F1166 AO ae E CubeSuite Update Manager keeps CubeSuite related software and documents up to date Option Review update history Restore hidden updat estore en updates G Checking updates Change settings 4 Flease wait Help Exit NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20nx Remark The Checking for Updates dialog box appears as the manager checks for update information Figure 2 18 Checking for Updates Dialog Box Gr Checking updates Please wait R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 25 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Select update items A list of appropriate update items appears on the Select updates page Figure 2 19 Select updates Page CubeSuite Update Manager NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates All Gw Select updates T8KOR KGS uPD78F1166_A0 It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date Update Dewnload and install Download only E Downlead and install e ElDownload only 0 Updates DEB Option CubeSuite tS CubeSutte Vee Download size sx EB Rewew
154. ects Thursday May 13 z010 5 54 30 PM R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 254 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 28 Build Execution Results Rapid Build Output C CubeSuite Test 2010 SampleProjects Ve8so0 es0std Debugtnly make WK WKK E Program Maintenance Utility Version WKK 200 Copyright C JOEY 3O0F 3oor WWWX All rights reserved EOF All Messages Build Tool h Rapid Build Remark The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed E 5 1 Run a build The command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 1 Setting the command when running a build This allows you to run a build of only updated files The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see E 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed Remark If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build then all these files are saved 1 When running a build of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Click the EJ button on the toolbar Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subpr
155. efaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 69 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS bcbA build mode name bcA build mode name npAplug in name plug in name plug in optionA plug in parameter project file name Remark While CubeSuite is running press the Ctrl C keys to forcibly terminate CubeSuite Perform a clean and then execute a build Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will e
156. elow Create a new build mode Change the build mode 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 250 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 20 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode EA to Build mode list DetaultB uild Duplicate Select the build mode to be duplicated from Build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box will open Figure E 21 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects including projects other than a debug dedicated project which currently belong to the project Figure E 22 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildModez Apply to All Build mode list iioii q Buildh ode 4 Remarks 1 Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to s
157. em button by text only the icon will not be displayed Text Only in Menus This is enabled only when a menu item is selected Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Image and Text Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by both text and icon Begin a Group Inserts separator just before the selected menu item button Recently Used This item is not supported in this version Figure A 58 Add Command Dialog Box Add Command Choose the command to add and click OK Categories Commands File 3 View Exit Build Debug View Project ProjectTree urbe Edit ie Project Tree R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 205 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Restores the arrangement of menu items or toolbar buttons belonging to the category Reset currently selected in the Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange area to its default state Close Finishes the arrangement of commands and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 206 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to displays versions of CubeSuite and each plug in product Figure A 59 Version Information Dialog Box Version Information so CubeSuite Cube Suite vixx Dox x soo 20xx ZUxx Re
158. emory For this reason if you are using IECUBE or the simulator you cannot omit eraseOption or specify EraseOp tion Code Return value None Detailed description This function erases the flash memory specified by eraseOption Example of use gt gt gt debugger Erase gt gt gt debugger Erase EraseOption External gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 293 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetBreakStatus This function displays a break condition Specification format debugger GetBreakStatus Argumeni s None Return value Break trigger string Remarks 1 Returns the string portion of the BreakStatus enum 2 Determine conditions by writing in the format BreakStatus string Detailed description This function displays break trigger string During execution this will be None R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 294 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetBreakStatus Temporary gt gt gt a debugger GetBreakStatus Temporary gt gt gt print a Temporary gt gt gt if debugger GetBreakStatus BreakStatus Temporary print Temporary break Temporary Temporary break gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 295 of 353 Oct 01 2010
159. en check agan to see whch updates you still need C al Cubetute VEI Downoad size mx KE Ths is update for CubeSurte Sl CubeSute Update Manager VRE Download size mz EB This is update tor CubeSutte Update Manager The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Restore hidden updates Description of each area 1 Button Restore The selected updates become visible enabling them to be re checked and installed 2 Hidden Updates Display area Displays a list of updates that were hidden via the Select updates page R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 85 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error page This page appears when acquisition of update information fails Figure A 8 Error Page G Error 0110000 Failed to get update information The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Opens automatically when acquisition of update information fails Description of each area 1 Message area Displays a message that the acquisition of update information fails 2 Button Retry Re acquires update information R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 86 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Checking for Updates dialog box This dialog
160. er Download Binary64Kb fileName address append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file address Specify a download start address append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only filename and address Return value None Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads binary files in within 64 KB format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Binary64Kb C test testModule bin 0x1000 False gt gt gt debugger Download Binary64Kb C test testModule2 bin 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 284 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download BinaryBank This function downloads a binary file in memory bank format Specification format debugger Download BinaryBank fileName address append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file address Specify a download start address append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be specified It is not po
161. er 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Whole Search tab In this tab the designated characters are searched in batch and the search results are listed in the Output panel The Output panel is used to jump to the relevant location by double clicking the search result Figure A 36 Search and Replace Dialog Box Whole Search Tab Search and Replace 3 Search location Current opened files Option search criteria Plain text we 4 File type Gase sensitive Word by word Open file before replacing Function buttons Option search The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Search From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Search text Designate characters to search You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel words variable function at the caret position are shown by default 2 Replace with This item is disabled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 159 of 353 Oct 01 2010
162. er 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 45 Edit Colors Dialog Box Edit Colors Basic colors Define Custom Colors gt 2 Display example area Display sample text using the color and font settings from the Color options area and the Font settings for text edi tor area By default the string AaBbCc is shown but you can type an arbitrary string directly into the text box 3 Font settings for text editor area Click the Font button to open the Font Dialog Box and configure the fonts for your text editor Figure A 46 Font Dialog Box Font style Microsoft Sans Sent Regular Microsoft Sans Serif Italic F Miriam Fixed Bold Miriam Transparent Bold Italic O MY Boli J O Myriad Web Pro O Myriad Web Pro Condi Effects Sample Strikeout Underline ABB yee Script Wester w R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 181 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 182 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General External Tools category Use this categor
163. er Ok Select a copy destination folder and click the OK button c Confirm the copy destination folder and install The download files are copied to the specified folder Open the folder in Explorer and install from the download files 2 Deleting download files a Select download files Select the check boxes of download files in the History page and click the Delete button Figure 2 33 History Page History Ss lt You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs to update Select all Legend Download M Instal Successful Suspended Failed Title State Date E Code Generator Common Vx xx Monday September xx xxxx xxxxxx PM O CubeSuite Vz xx Monday September xx mox mxx PM Device Dependent Information for 723KOR Kx3 Vxxx Monday September xx max mxx PM Device Dependent Information for 73K0 Fx2 Vexx Monday September xx IX xxx xx PM R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 34 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Confirm whether you want to delete download files and delete them A Message dialog box asks whether you want to delete download files Figure 2 34 Message Dialog Box Question Q01 30001 P Do you wank to delete files corresponding to the selected updates If you click the Yes button the download files are deleted R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 35 of 353 O
164. er one line F D include The specified path contains a Folder that does nok exist Browse Subfolders are automatically included R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 240 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL This section describes how to create a project when debugging files generated with a build tool other than the one pro vided by CubeSuite CA850 CX CA78K0 CA78KOR E 1 Overview CubeSuite automatically determines the load module file or hex file output by the build tool provided by CubeSuite CA850 CX CA78K0 CA78KOR as the download file for debugging For this reason you must create a dedicated project hereafter referred to as a debug dedicated project in order to debug a load module file or hex file created by an exter nal build tool e g a compiler or assembler other than the build tool provided by CubeSuite as the download file Creating a debug dedicated project enables you to perform debugging without going through the build tool provided by CubeSuite A debug dedicated project also enables you to configure commands to execute build processes e g make suited to your execution environment and you can perform builds linked to an external build tool by executing these commands from CubeSuite The operational sequence for using a debug dedicated project is described below Figure E 1 Operational Sequence
165. ers 259 the path relative path is from the project folder or specified in the Browse For Folder dialog box opened by clicking the button in this area When fold ers are not specified the project folder name is shown in by default folder if the project does not exist the current user document folder is shown When File type is specified searches only the specified type Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4 Option area This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default The following options can be designated as search criteria a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Plain text Searches the characters designated in Search text Wild card b File type Searches using the following wildcard Arbitrary characters Arbitrary one character Specify File types to search Select one of the following items from the drop down list Source files Extensions Files to search are limited to the source files Text files txt Files to search are limited to the text files All files Searches all the files Note Shows extensions of the source file added to the Project Tree panel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2 CENESAS Page 166 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note that the searches can be operated by limiting the search crite
166. ertain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained
167. f the CubeSuite and the project by copying them in a folder Package This menu is always disabled You can rename the selected project Property Displays the selected project s property in Property panel 2 When a Subproject node is selected Build Actively project Builds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Actively project Rebuilds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Actively project Cleans the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 118 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects files and Category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to a project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to a project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to
168. f the update execution will appear on the Finish page Figure 2 25 Finish Page th CubeSuite Update Manager NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates All G Finish T8KOR KG3 uPD78F1166_A0 Finish updating CubeSuite Option Review update history Restore hidden updates success 1 WOocCubeSuite Vex susp ended 1 WocCubeSuite Update Manager Vz xx MO1Z000 1 Installation is suspended because CubeSuite Update Manager is Legend Download E gt Instal O Successful Suspended Failed Change settings Help Exit running It will be resumed next time you start the tool OF ailed 1 Device Information 7BEORE z2 Vaxx E0120004 Installation was aborted NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20xx Click the Exit to complete updating R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 29 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 The results of the download and or installation are displayed via Displays number of successful updates and update titles Displays number of canceled updates update titles and messages Displays number of failed updates update titles and messages 2 The icons below are displayed in the head of update titles Updates are installed 2 4 2 The auto update feature This section describes the auto update The auto update feature performs some of the tasks of the manual update feature automatically when a CubeSuite project is opened 1 Auto
169. file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project as a download file Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 6 When the File node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in ope
170. for Using a Debug dedicated Project Creating a debug dedicated project E 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project Settings of the download file E 3 Add a File to a Project Executing builds linked to an external build tool Settings of commands E 4 Make Settings for Build Operations Running a build E 5 Runa Build Debug phase See the CubeSuite Debug Caution The design tool code generator and the analyze tool are not available for a debug dedicated project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 241 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project The creation of a debug dedicated project is performed with the Create Project dialog box that is opened by selecting Create New Project from the Project menu or Add gt gt Add New Subproject from the context menu after selecting the Project node on the project tree as well as the method of creating a project described in 2 6 2 Create a new project or 2 6 3 Add anew subproject To create a debug dedicated project however specify Debug Only with the Kind of project item on the Create Project dialog box Figure E 2 Create Project Dialog Box Creating a Debug dedicated Project Greate Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller ley VEBOES MAG wk HPD703137 Ad 44pin Product NameuPO 0s1 371 4 Internal ROM size k Bytes 256 Internal RAM size Bytes 1 6304
171. ft F GP Rebuild Project oat Build SubProject_DebugOnly Build SubProject_DebugOnly Rebuild SubProject_DebugOnly Rebuild SubProject_DebugOnly Clean SubProject_DebugOnly a Clean SubProject_DebugOnly Build Mode Settings Build Mode Settings Batch Build El Batch Build Build Qption List Build Option List Caution This function is valid only when editing source files with the Editor panel Remarks 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 _Enabling disabling a rapid build is set for the entire project main project and subprojects 3 If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 258 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 5 Run a batch build A batch build is a function that builds rebuilds and cleans are run in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box will open Figure E 34 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild BuildMode DefaultBuild BuildMode In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions Defined macros is inva
172. get updates installed that is complete Function buttons R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 88 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Update Manager Options dialog box This dialog box displays and changes the Update Manager options Figure A 11 Update Manager Options Dialog Box Update Manager Options Automatic Updates CubeSuite can check for updates regularly Category lf updates are found Cubes Lite Download updates automatically and notify Device List me wher it s finished Device Dependent Information 1 Parameter File Notify me but do not automatically download Update Manager Uthers them Do nothing Internet Connections 2S You can change the proxy settings used to check and download updates in the 2 1 Internet Options in Control Panel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Change settings Description of each area 1 Automatic Updates area a Category Select the category of for which to configure the behavior for found updates b If updates are found Set the behavior for found updates Select the action to perform for the selected category Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished If corresponding updates are found d
173. gura tion For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores the configuration of the current tab to default of the project default configura tion For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 126 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project tab This tab shows the detailed information on projects main project categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File 2 Notes Figure A 20 Property Panel Project Tab Property LA sample Property El File Hotes File name This ie the name of the file to which the information of this main project is to be Description of each category 1 File The detailed information on files are displayed File name Displays the file name of the file to save the information on the main project Default Name of the main project file How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the main project file to save the information on them Default Absolute name of main projects How to change Changes not allowed 2 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Memo Add memos to main pro
174. h panel Watch1 Shows the Watch 1 panel Watch2 Shows the Watch 2 panel Watch3 Shows the Watch 3 panel Watch4 Shows the Watch 4 panel Local Variable Shows the Local Variables panel Call Stack Shows the Call Stack panel Memory Displays a cascading menu for opening a Memory panel Memory1 Shows the Memory 1 panel Memory2 Shows the Memory 2 panel Memory3 Shows the Memory 3 panel Memory4 Shows the Memory 4 panel SFR 78KO 78KOR IOR V850 Shows the SFR panel 78K0 78KOR IOR panel V850 CPU Register Shows the CPU Register panel Trace Shows the Trace panel IECUBE Simulator Disassemble Displays a cascading menu for opening a Disassemble panel Disassemble1 Shows the Disassemble 1 panel Disassemble2 Shows the Disassemble 2 panel Disassemble Shows the Disassemble 3 panel Disassemble4 Shows the Disassemble 4 panel Event Shows the Events panel Show Current PC Location Shows the current PC location in the Editor panel If there is no source information or source file at the PC location it is shown ina Disassemble panel If the Editor or Disassemble panel to show the location is already visible then the focus will move to that panel Forward to Next Cursor Position Goes to the move destination Back to Last Cursor Position Returns to the last location before moving to the defined location Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and col umn R2
175. h text Designate characters to search You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel words variable function at the caret position are shown by default 2 Replace with Designate characters to be replaced You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 162 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Search location Designate the location to search Select one of the following items from the drop down list Selection area Searches the selection in the search enabled panel which was active the last time If there is no characters in selection in the panel which was last active or the panel can not be searched this item will be disabled Current panel Panel Name Searches in the panel which was last active and can be searched If the panel which was lastly active cannot be searched or the panel does not exist this item will be disabled Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4
176. h text Designate characters to search You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel words variable function at the caret position are shown by default 2 Replace with This item is disabled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 156 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Search location Designate the location to search Select one of the following items from the drop down list Selection area Searches the selection in the search enabled panel which was active the last time If there is no characters in selection in the panel which was last active or the panel can not be searched this item will be disabled Current panel Panel Name Searches in the panel which was last active and can be searched If the panel which was lastly active cannot be searched or the panel does not exist this item will be disabled Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4 Option area The following options can be designated as search criterias This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default a Search criteria Select
177. hErase erase Argumeni s Specify the CPU reset setting during download in a bool type Set or reference the debugging tool s CPU Reset after download property True Set the property to Yes False Set the property to No Specify the erase Flash memory setting during download in a bool type Set or reference the debugging tool s Erase flash ROM before download property True Set the property to Yes False Set the property to No Return value If the property is set to Yes True If the property is set to No False Caution If a PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project Detailed description This property sets or reference the download property of the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt print debugger Downlaod CpuReset False gt gt gt debugger Download CpuReset True gt gt gt print debugger Download CpuReset True gt gt gt print debugger Downlaod FlashErase False gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 342 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory NoVerify This property switches the write time verification setting Specification format debugger Memory NoVerify noverify Argumeni s noverify Specify whether to verify during write
178. he Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 249 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 18 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text make clean In Text enter the command to be executed with one item per line The commands can be specified up to 256 characters per line up to 256 lines If you click the OK button the entered commands are displayed as subproperties Figure E 19 Commands executed in the project cleaning Property After Setting Commands make clean Remark The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuilldModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder To change the specified commands you can use the button or enter the command directly in the text box of the subproperty E 4 2 Set the build mode You can collectively change the settings of the commands executed according to the purpose of the build The commands set in E 4 1 Set ihe commands are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the command settings every time i e the command settings can be made with each build mode The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add and change a build mode is shown b
179. he path of the project folder is displayed by default a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box lf a folder is selected the path will be added in the text box Remarks 1 Ifthe text box is blank it is assumed that the project folder is designated 2 Ifthe relative path is designated the reference point of the path is the project folder Remark Up to 259 characters path and file name combined can be specified in the File name area and File loca tion area When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown on the File name area in the tooltip The file name including the path is too long Make it The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not The path contains a folder that does not exist exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated characters cannot be used lt gt The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt Function buttons Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Editor panel And then closes this dialog box Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 142 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ve
180. heir associated icons if any If All Commands is selected under Categories then all commands provided by CubeSuite appear with their associated icons if any R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 202 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Specify a Shortcut area This area displays the default shortcut key currently assigned to the command selected under Commands if no keys area assigned then None appears To change the assigned shortcut key select a key from the following drop down list and then click the Assign but ton Shit Beet 3 Current assigned to This area displays the command currently assigned to the shortcut key specified in the Specify a Shortcut area if no commands are assigned to this key then None appears 4 Description area This area displays a popup describing the function of the command selected under Commands Function buttons Assigns the shortcut key selected under Commands to the command selected under the Specify a Shortcut area Note however that this button will be disabled if the key selected in the Specify a Short cut area is already assigned to another command Remove Removes the assignment of the shortcut key selected under the Specify a Shortcut area to the command selected under Commands None will appear in the Specify a Shortcut area drop down list Note ho
181. his menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 117 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to a project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to a project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add toa project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Selected project Active Sets the selected project to an active project Project Save Project and CubeSuite as Saves a Set o
182. idate and selects themN Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box Note If the designated characters cannot be searched Can not found Search text is displayed on the status bar of the Main window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 164 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Whole Replace tab In this tab batch search is done with the designated characters and then they are replaced to the characters to be replaced in batch Figure A 38 Search and Replace Dialog Box Whole Replace Tab search and Replace 1 Search text abe wt Replace with 3 Search location Current Current opened files 0 M files JR Option Search criteria Plain text J 4 File type ource TilesChe heinckeemn dex dit Gase sensitive Word by word Open file before replacing Function buttons Option The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Search From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Search text Designate characters to search You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with th
183. ification format debugger XTrace Addup addup debugger xTrace Complement complement debugger xXTrace Mode traceMode Argumeni s addup Specify whether to add up times tags True Add up times tags False Do not add up times tags complement Specify whether to supplement the trace True Supplement the trace False Do not supplement the trace traceMode Specify the trace control mode The trace control modes that can be specified are shown below TraceMode FullBreak Stop program execution and writing of trace data after all trace data has been used up TraceMode FullStop Stop writing trace data after all trace data has been used up TraceMode NonStop Continue writing trace data even if all trace data has been used up Return value The set value Caution If a PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project Detailed description This property sets or reference the tracing options of the debug tool R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 346 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt print debugger XTrace Addup False gt gt gt debugger xXTrace Addup True gt gt gt print debugger XTrace Addup True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 347 of 35
184. ill be invalid Deletes the selected files and Category nodes When the file is selected it is deleted from the file system When the selected file is also added to other project it is not deleted from the file system but removed from the project While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are deleted Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or the Category node is selected You can rename the selected project subproject file and Category node Press Enter key to confirm the rename Press ESC key to cancel When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project those file names are also changed Note that this menu is only enabled when the project subproject file and Category node is selected Note that rename is disabled when the build tool is operating Help menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Open Help for Project Tree Panel Context menu Displays the help of this panel 1 When a Project node is selected Build Actively project Rebuild Actively project Clean Actively project Open Folder with Explorer Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that t
185. in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for 78KO microcontrollers 78KOR microcontrollers and V850 microcontrollers and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for 78KO microcontrollers 78KOR microcontrollers and V850 microcontrollers integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the Cubesuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices Organization This manual can be broadly divided into the following
186. install Download only CubeSutte CubeSuite VES Option Download size mg EB Review update history Restore hidden updates This is update for CubeSutte Detail Change settings Update Manager CubeSuite Update Manager Vx Hel eP Download size zx EE Exit This is update for CubeSutte Update Manager Detail NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20xx Check the information and click the Install button 4 Confirm the download and install progress Update items are downloaded and then the are installed A progress bar on the Updaie in progress dialog box dis plays the download and install progress The download and install progress of each tool appear in the Update status area Figure 2 21 Update in progress Dialog Box Downloading Update in progress Gy Downloading updates Update status Downloading CubeSuite Ys ss 29 complete Downloading 1 2 Cancel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 27 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Cautions 1 Update in progress Gq Installing updates Downloading CubeSuite Ww ss Complete downloading CubeSuite Ww sx Installing CubeSuite Ww ax Figure 2 22 Update in progress Dialog Box Installing Cancel You must have administrator privileges to perform installation 2 Ifa emulator USB driver is installed on Windows Vista or Windows 7 the warning dialog box may appear Go to 7 5
187. ion area This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default The following options can be designated as search criteria a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Plain text Searches the characters designated in Search text Wild card b File type Searches using the following wildcard Arbitrary characters Arbitrary one character Specify File types to search Select one of the following items from the drop down list Source files Extensions Files to search are limited to the source files Fles to search ae limited to the text Ties Note Show extensions of the source file added to the Project Tree panel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 160 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note that the searches can be operated by limiting the search criteria by directly entering the file name in the text box maximum characters 1024 If this is the case the wildcard can be used and multiple file names can be specified by separating them with 3 Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list c Case sensitive Searches with the designated characters in case sensitive Searches with the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Word by word Searches with a designated exact word Searches with at least one of the words def
188. ion of an existing project to the new project Check this check box when reusing the file composition of the existing project main or subproject to create a new project The check box is unchecked by default The category of the file can be also reused b Project to be passed Designate the name of the source project when diverting the file composition of the existing project to create a new project Designate the name of the source project by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting with the Open Project dialog box after pressing the Browse button The last designated location is shown in the box C Documents and Settings User name My Documents is the default location when the file is created for the first time This field is enabled only when the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked Caution You cannot designate the PM project file c Button Browse Open Project dialog box appears When a project file is selected an absolute path of the project file is shown in Project to be passed Remarks 1 When the version of the build tool used in the source project is different from the version of the build tool in the project to be created it is automatically diverted except for a debug dedicated project 2 When the build tool for the project to be created does not support a node of the source project the node will be displayed as a normal Category node o
189. is is update for CubeSuite Update Manager Detail The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Download and install From the Select updates page main area click Download and install Description of each area 1 Button Install Begins the download and installation process This button is disabled if no updates are selected Caution If a driver is updated on Windows Vista the Driver Warning dialog box may appear during instal lation If you choose to cancel the installation in the warming dialog box the driver installation will fail R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 79 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Update Selection area Displays a list of items to update The following information is displayed for each update Category Displays the category of the update Updates with the same category are displayed together Displays the title of the update Displays the download size of the update Displays a summary of the update information Detail This appears if there is detailed information about the update Selecting it will display details in a browser R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 80 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download only page This page displays a list of selected updates a
190. is specified by ie Type Remark When the DCU register is referenced the register value is reset to 0 Example of use gt gt gt debugger Ie GetValue IeType Reg 0x100 Ox12 gt gt gt debugger Ie SetValue IeType Reg 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt debugger Ie GetValue IeType Reg 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 300 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger lsConnected This function checks the connection status of the debug tool Specification format debugger IsConnected Argumeni s None Return value If the debug tool is connected True If the debug tool is not connected False Detailed description This function checks the connection status of the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt 1if debugger IsConnected True print OK OK R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 301 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger lsRunning This function checks the execution status of the debug tool Specification format debugger IsRunning Argument s None Return value If the debug tool is running True If the debug tool is not running False Detailed description This function checks the execution status of the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt if debugger IsRunning True print OK OK R20
191. isplays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel using the ASCII character set default h Close window when command exit This item is disabled if the Use Output panel check box is selected Closes the Windows command prompt when the new external tool exits B Leaves the Windows command prompt open after the new external tool exits default R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 185 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 186 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 48 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category g L General Startup and Exit Display Font and External Tools cy Update S Others User Information Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build General Build Debug Enable Rapi
192. ist Regardless of this setting all messages are displayed in the Output panel Displays all messages in a Message dialog box Displays warning and error messages in a Message dialog box default Only displays error messages in a Message dialog box Only displays fatal error messages in a Message dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 173 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Toolbar display type Use this area to select the format in which to display toolbars on each panel via the following drop down list Icon only Displays icons only default Icon and label Displays both icons and labels text 3 Show function key commands Displays the Function Key bar in the Main window default Does not display the Function Key bar in the Main window 4 Show window contents while resizing Resizes the window while displaying areas that were not visible before Resizes the window without displaying areas that were not visible before default 5 Tab width Specify the number of tab columns Either enter a number between 1 and 16 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the buttons The default is 8 6 Select the file opened with text editor in project tree When the Editor panel is activated the file currently being opened is selected in the Project Tree panel default oOo Even if the Editor panel is activated the file cu
193. itor category 175 General Update category 189 Go to the Location dialog box 152 H History page 84 M Main window 94 Make settings for build operations 248 Microcontroller Information tab 130 N New Toolbar dialog box 199 O One Point Advice dialog box 212 Open Project dialog box 215 Option dialog box 169 General Build Debug category 187 General Display category 173 General External Tools category 183 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 348 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX G INDEX General Font and Color category 178 General Startup and Exit category 171 General Text Editor category 175 General Update category 189 Other User Information category 191 Other amp Windows dialog box 214 Other User Information category 191 Output panel 138 P PM project 57 Progress Status dialog box 168 Project tab 127 project 39 Project Tree panel 113 Property panel 123 Build Options tab 132 Microcontroller Information tab 130 Project tab 127 Subproject tab 128 Python Console panel 232 Q Quick Replace tab 162 Quick Search tab 156 R Rapid build 258 Rearrange Commands dialog box 204 Rebuild 256 Rename Toolbar dialog box 201 Restore hidden updates page 85 S Sav
194. ject When Yes is selected The source files are converted When No is selected The source files are not converted R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 111 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Backup of project before conversion area Make settings relating to backing up the source project a Backup the project composition files before conversion Select this check box if you wish to backup the entire source project and its source files as a single bundle b Place Specify the location in which to save the entire source project and its source files Enter the absolute path directly or click the Browse button and select the location via the Browse For Folder dialog box By default project folder of project being created_backup is displayed If there is already a folder with the same name a number 2 3 will be added to the folder name This field is enabled only when the Backup the project composition files before conversion check box is checked c Button Browse Browse For Folder dialog box appears When a folder is selected the path is shown in the text box Remarks 1 Function buttons Button Up to 247 characters can be entered in Place When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown The folder name including the path is too long The folder name is more than 247 characters Make it within
195. ject ks TE M C DefaultBuild My Recent Documents My Documents 95 My Computer My Network Files of type Subproject File for CubeSuite cssp w On the dialog box specify the subproject file of the subproject to add and click the Open button R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 49 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 3 Project is added to the favorites menu You can add the currently open project to the menu as a favorite project up to four projects From the Project menu select Favorites Projects gt gt 7 4 Register Favorites Project the path of the currently open project is registered under the Project menu gt gt Favorites Projects Figure 2 52 Favorites Projects b F Figure 2 53 Favorite Projects F Register to Favorites Project Item 7 1 Register to Favorites Project 2 Register to Favorites Project 3 Register to Favorites Project 4 Register to Favorites Project F i F Fi z F im iD Fi z mig 1 Register to Favorite Project 2 Register to Favorite Project 3 Register to Favorite Project 4 Register to Favorite Project Favorites Projects Item After Registering a Project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 50 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 4 Remove a subproject from the project To remove a subproject registered to a
196. jects Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 127 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Subproject tab This tab shows the detailed information on subproject categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File 2 Notes Figure A 21 Property Panel Subproject Tab Property Ls sub Property El File Save with absolute path Hotes File name This is the name of the file to which the information of this subproject is to be saved Description of each category 1 File The detailed information on files are displayed File name Displays the file name of the file to save the information on the subproject Default Name of the subproject file How to change Changes not allowed Relative path Displays the relative path of the subproject file to which subproject information is saved from the location of the main project This property is shown only when the subproject is selected in Project Tree panel Note that if the relative path does not exist such as the case that the main project and sub
197. kage version gt Compiler package used in PM project Version gt Compiler package used in CubeSuite project Version 4 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Tool name of PM Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option 5 lt Options to change Build mode gt Tool name of PM Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option of PM project gt Option of CubeSuite project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 58 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Time and date on which a project was converted The time and date on which a PM project was converted into a CubeSuite project is output using format dddd mmmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM IDE version The version of CubeSuite is output Compiler package version The compiler package used in a PM project and the version and the compiler package used in a CubeSuite project and the version are output The version of the compiler package used in a CubeSuite projectis is the latest version in the compiler packages which are installed in the CubeSuite environment exist Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a PM project and has been changed to use in a CubeSuite project option that the range the parameter can be specified has been changed and option that has been changed by upgrading the compiler package exists the information is output for each build mode in the format sho
198. kground color Light P gray R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 138 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when build ing b Display of help Displays the help with regard to the displayed message or the message at the current caret by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error message is displayed c Save of log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from File menu and opens the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows Build Tool ee the messages output by the build tool when a build rebuild or batch build is executed Rapid Build Displays the messages output by the build tool when a rapid build is executed Debug Tool Displays the message output from the debug tool Displays the messages output by the code generator Progr
199. l be project group name csp PM projects are converted to subprojects with the same name as the original project After conversion the subproject file name will be project name cssp After conversion the first subproject shown in the Project Tree will be the active project Figure 2 60 PM Project Conversion Image PM workspace before conversion CubeSuite project after conversion Workspace WS Project PG1 Open this project Project group PG1 Active project Subproject P11 Project P11 Subproject P12 Project P12 This project is Project group PG2 Project PG2 registered in recently E Subproject P21 used projects Project P21 Remarks 1 After conversion CubeSuite opens the project that was converted from the PM project group that includes the active project Projects other than this project are registered in recently used projects However the number of projects that exceeds four is not registered 2 The project settings after conversion of those in the PM project group are set to the same set tings as the project listed first in the workspace file In addition files are not registered 3 If you wish to organize each of the projects into a single project after conversion add each project as a subproject to a single project 4 When loading a workspace that includes projects without build tools specified build tools are set according to the microcontroller Cautions 1 Only projects that can be loaded b
200. l folder The folder CubeSuite is Copy_Files The copy location folder for files not placed in the project copylog txt A record of the copied files 1 Storage folder 1 for copied filesNote 2 Storage folder 2 for copied filesNote Note The digits in the folder name are adjusted by the required number of folders For example for 2 digits the name is 01 02 and so on Cautions 1 Information on the start menu is not a subject of the save When using the save location tools follow the content of readme txt in the save folder 2 Information on the tool installation is not a subject of the save To uninstall the save location tools delete the entire save folder 3 Custom settings made in the Option dialog box and User Setting dialog box are not saved When you use tools from the saved file the environment will be configured to the default set tings 4 Tools in the save folder cannot be updated 5 When saving we recommend the files registered to the project be placed inside the project folder when possible Files not placed inside the project folder are copied to the Copy _files folder when saving so when using the save location project you must re register the files to the project 6 Emulator drivers are not saved If you use a pack on another computer you must install the drivers separately R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 63 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 4 Close a proje
201. l node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node or Category node in Project Tree panel Then select Property in View menu or in the context menu On the Code Generator panel click Generate Code button and then select Property from the View menu or context menu On the Code Generator Preview panel select file and then select Property from the View menu or context menu Remark When either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node or Category node is selected in Project Tree panel while the Property panel is open the detailed information of the selected node is displayed Description of each area 1 Name for the selected node area The name of the selected node in Project Tree panel is displayed This area is left blank when multiple nodes are selected R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 123 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categoraized in the list Also you can directly change the settings of the selected node The node includes Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node and Category node The E mark in
202. lder where the executable file is located c Startup options Specify the startup options for the new external tool up to 247 characters The startup option variables that can be specified here are as follows If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces File The name of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel with absolute path is passed to the external tool If more than one file is selected the information for the file in which the cursor is located is passed OutputFile The program passes to the external tool the name of the module file with absolute path that is output when the project for the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is built if there is no selection then nothing is passed LIine lf the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is being edited in the Editor panel then the line on which the caret is located is passed if the Editor panel does not have focus then 1 is passed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 184 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Startup folder Specify the absolute path to the folder for launching the external tool up to 247 characters The start folder variables that can be specified here are as follows If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces FileDir The name of the folder for the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel
203. lect the license you wish to delete from the Licenses area then click the Remove button to delete the license Figure 2 16 CubeSuite License Manager Window CubeSuite License Manager S You can add and remove license of CubeSuite and related tools i License key i case insensiive and does not contain alpabetical Ol hes Add this License key PO License Se ee eee CubeSuite for 78K Standard Edition CubeSuite for FSE Standard Edition License kep MMB HMMEIE MMISM BSAA Lb abt Serial number xeeMMHE R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 24 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Using the Update Feature The update feature updates installed tools and documents to their latest versions It acquires information about the latest versions via the Internet and then downloads and installs them There are two update methods manual update where you perform the update guided by information displays and auto update which automatically updates according to your settings Cautions 1 When you use the update feature the host machine must have a connection to the Internet 2 You must register the license to use the update feature See 2 3 Using the License Management Feature for how to register the license 2 4 1 The manual update feature This section describes the manual update 1 Launch Update Manager From the Windows the Start menu select Programs gt gt NEC El
204. lect updates area If a microcontroller was specified the microcontroller name appears Download and install Downloads the selected updates and after the downloads are complete install them Download only Downloads the selected updates only R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 77 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Update selection area Displays a list of items to update The following information is displayed for each update Category Displays the category of the update Updates with the same category are displayed together Displays the title of the update Displays the download size of the update Displays a summary of the update information Detail This appears if there is detailed information about the update Selecting it will display details in a browser 3 Button Hide If an update is selected in the Update Selection area it is completely hidden R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 78 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download and install page This page displays a list of selected updates and starts the download and installation process Figure A 3 Download and install Page Download and install 2 Updates xxx EB Install CubeSute CubeSute VE EX Downoad size zx EE Thuis is update tor Cubesuwte Detal Update Manager 3 CubeSuite Update Manager Yz Download size max EB Th
205. lid when the target project is a debug dedi cated project is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remarks 1 See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build E 5 1 Runa build Rebuild E 5 2 Runa rebuild Clean E 5 3 Run a clean 2 The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run 3 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a batch build then all these files are saved 4 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then builds rebuilds cleans will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite Build E 5 6 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click the button on the toolbar Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and batch build Build E 5 1 Runa build Rebuild E 5 2 Runa rebuild Batch build E 5 5 Runa batch build R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 259 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUI
206. llowing and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Microcontroller Information 3 Notes Figure A 22 Property Panel Microcontroller Information Tab Property JE uPD7OF3746 Property El File Information O Microcontroller Infomeabton Hotes File name This ts the file name of this device file li i F Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file is shown File name Displays device file name How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the device file Default The absolute path of the device file How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 130 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Microcontroller Information The detailed information on microcontrollers is displayed and their configuration can be changed Bank size KBytes Displays the bank size of the microcontroller being used in Kbytes as a decimal number Note that this property is only shown for microcontrollers with a memory bank 3 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to the microcontroller information The memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty s Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when
207. location to create the project file enter it as an absolute path 5 Specify the reuse of the file structure of an existing project When creating a project that reuses the file structure of an existing project check Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project and specify the location of the project filename to reuse in Project to be passed Caution You cannot specify a PM project file If you wish to copy an existing PM project open the project in CubeSuite then save it as a CubeSuite project see 2 7 8 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project for details Next specify the saved project file in this area Remarks 1 When the version of the build tool used in the source project is different from the version of the build tool in the project to be created it is automatically diverted the case that Debug Only is specified with Kind of project is excluded 2 You can create a project with CX as the build tool by reusing the file structure of a project with CA850 as the build tool see 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project An image of the dialog box after setting the items is shown below R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 44 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 44 Create Project Dialog Box After Setting Items Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller te VO5OES ALI SME wPOFOF3743 144pin PPO FOF 37441 44pir Produ
208. mat at address value If address is omitted then the location of the pc value is displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger Whereami foo c func at foo c 100 gt gt gt debugger Whereami 0x100 foo c main at foo c 20 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 331 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XCoverage Clear This function clears the coverage memory Specification format debugger XCoverage Clear Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function clears the coverage memory Example of use gt gt gt debugger XCoverageClear gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 332 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XCoverage GetCoverage This function gets the coverage Specification format debugger XCoverage GetCoverage funcName progName fileName Argumeni s funcName Specify the function name to retrieve coverage for progName Specify the name of the load module containing the function If there is only one load module then this can be omitted default fileName Specify the name of the file containing the function If it is a global function then this can be omitted default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be sp
209. me WPDT03132 AC 44pin me WPD703132BY4 44pin me POTON 33 40 44pin me WPD703133 AC 44pin Kind of project Debug Only Project name DebueOnily Place C Cubesuite w Make the project folder G Cubesuite DebueOnly DebueOnly cep Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project When you click the Create button after configuring all settings the project file of the debug dedicated project is created in the location specified in the Place item and the structure of the created debug dedicated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel Note See 2 6 2 Create a new project or 2 6 3 Add anew subproject for details on how to configure each item Figure E 3 Project Tree Panel After Creating a Debug dedicated Project Project Tree E LA DebugOnly Project JE wPD7031314 Microcontroller besiqn Tool In a debug dedicated project the build tool name is shown as None Build Tool ce 8SO Simulator Debug Tool a QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Bl File E th Download files R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 242 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 3 Adda File to a Project Add a download file to debug to the created debug dedicated project Furthermore to perform source level debugging add C source files to be used for creation of the download file to the pr
210. ms efficiently Analysis You can analyze the source program and information while the program is executing and display information about the functions and variables Flash programming You can execute commands on the microcontroller s onboard Flash memory including blank check erase write verify and read by configuring information on the CubeSuite panels Updates Communicate with the update server to get the latest version of this product R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 12 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 3 System Configuration Below is shown an example of the system configuration Figure 1 1 System Configuration Host machine CubeSuite Design tools Build tools etc Supported target environments Simulator Supported target environments Emulator IECUBE IECUBE2 On chip debug emulators MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Target system R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 13 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 4 Operating Environment Below are the system requirements for this product 1 Hardware environment Processor At least 1 GHz support for hyper threading multi core CPU Main memory Atleast 512 MB 1 GB or higher recommended Display Resolution at least 1 204 x 768 at least 65 536 colors Interface USB 2 0 2 Software environment Windows XP Only 32 bit OS Professional Home Edition Windows Vista 32 bi
211. n Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select the Download files node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the con text menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be created When the file type is selected the description is displayed at the lower box The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Text file txt All files R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 141 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to be created c is displayed by default Remark If any extension is not designated the one selected in the File type area will be added Also if the extension different from the one selected in the File type area is designated the one selected in the File type area will be added for example if you designate aaa txt as the file name and select C source file c as the file type the file is named as aaa txt c Note that if All files is selected in the File type area no extension will be added 3 File location area Designate the location to be created the file by directly entering its path or selecting from the Refer button T
212. n the project building property In this property set the command to execute the required build processing e g make Figure E 14 Commands executed in the project building Property Commande TTA If the aea JEE Commands excecuted in the project cleaning ll If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 248 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 15 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit In Text enter the command to be executed with one item per line The commands can be specified up to 256 characters per line up to 256 lines If you click the OK button the entered commands are displayed as subproperties Figure E 16 Commands executed in the project building Property After Setting Commands Remark The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder 2 Setting the command when running a clean Set the command to be executed when running a clean see E 5 3 Run a clean in the Commands executed in the project cleaning property In this property set the command to delete intermediate files generated files and the like output by the build pro cess Figure E 17 Commands executed in the project cleaning Property If you click the button t
213. n to the project other than DefaultBuild DefaultBuild R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 132 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Build The detailed information on a build is displayed and their configuration can be changed Commands executed in the project building Commands executed in the project cleaning 3 Notes Specify the commands to be executed when running a build see E 5 1 Run a build of the debug dedicated project The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder Default Commands executed in the project building 0 How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the but ton For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 commands can be specified Specify the commands to be executed when running a clean see E 5 3 Run a clean of the debug dedicated project The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder Default Commands executed in the project cleanning 0 How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the but ton For the subpropert
214. n Configurator Design Tool a None Build Tool ch W850 Simulator Debug Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool A Pin Configurator Design Tool a None Build Tool cs W850 Simulator Debug Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool ce File Remarks 1 Immediately after creating a project newly the main project is the active project 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 253 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build for a debug dedicated project 1 Build types The types of operations related to builds which can be linked to an external build tool in a debug dedicated project are as follows Table E 1 Build Types Build Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category in the Property panel Build can run a build of only updated filesN gt See E 5 1 Runa build Rebuild Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel and then executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the category same as above Rebuild can run a build of all build target filesN
215. n Fuctions 68 2 11 Manipulate CubeSuite on the Command Line 69 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 73 A 1 Description 73 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 236 APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED 237 APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS 239 D 1 Input Conventions 239 D 2 Displaying Icons at Locations of Input Errors 240 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 241 E 1 Overview 241 E 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project 242 E 3 Add a File to a Project 243 E 3 1 Add a download file 243 E 3 2 Add C source files and other files 244 E 3 3 Remove an added file from a project 247 E 4 Make Settings for Build Operations 248 E 4 1 Set the commands 248 E 4 2 Set the build mode 250 E 4 3 Set the target project for a build 253 E 5 Runa Build 254 E 5 1 Runa build 255 E 5 2 Runarebuild 256 E 5 3 Run a clean 256 E 5 4 Runa rapid build 258 E 5 5 Runa batch build 259 E 5 6 Stop running a build 259 E 5 7 Save the build results to a file 260 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS 261 F 1 Overview 261 F 2 Related File 261 F 3 CubeSuite Python Functions 261 APPENDIX G INDEX 348 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL This chapter describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for the 78KO microcontroller 78KOR microcontroller and V850 microcontroller
216. n the information text area to the clip board Select All Selects all the characters in the information text area Context menu Copies the selected characters in the information text area to the clip board Select All Selects all the characters in the information text area Function buttons Copy All Text Copies all the characters displayed in the information text area to the clip board Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 211 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE One Point Advice dialog box This dialog box is used to display tips for using CubeSuite Figure A 61 One Point Advice Dialog Box One Point Advice i E i _ M C CubeSuite o you know To use a wider creen Fress the Automatically Hide button with the pin icon at the top of each panel When a panel is not used that panel automatically becomes a tab 1 at the side of the window resulting in a wider Usable screen area Displayed contents random n e Te 3 e Do not show this dialog box at startup HtFunction buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select One Point Advice Automatically opens at CubeSuite startup when Do not show this dialog box at startup is unchecked Description of each area 1 Tips dis
217. n the project tree e g Startup node or Down load files node etc 3 Upto 259 characters can be entered in Project to be passed When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 109 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File name with the path is too long Shorten The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The designated path includes the folder that The path includes the folder that does not exist does not exist Invalid file name or path name The charac The file name with the invalid path is designated The ters lt gt cannot be used characters lt gt cannot be used for the folder name 4 When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over rr Function buttons Create Creates a project according to the designated condition and closes the dialog box When the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked creates a project by diverting the file composition of the project main or sub project designated in Project to be passed If the build tool of the source project is CA850 and the build tool of the project to create is CX opens the Source Convert Setting dialog box CX to select whether t
218. nal RAM sizelbptes 8192 Eind of project Applicationf Es ka Place D work sample w C Make the project folder D work samplesample Cx csp Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Project to be passed Do work sampleample cepi w Set the items in the order below and click the Create button 1 Select the microcontroller type Select V850 on Microcontroller 2 Select the microcontroller Select the microcontroller to use in the project on Using microcontroller 3 Select the project type Under Kind of project select Application CX or Library CX in accordance with the source project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 53 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the project name and location to create the project file Specify the name of the project and the location to create the project file in Project name and Place If you don t create a folder with the project name under the specified location clear the Make the project folder check box 5 Specify the reuse of a CA850 project Check Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project and specify the location of the project filename to reuse in Project to be passed Caution Werecommend using the same project folder as the source project in order to avoid breaking the relationship between the project folder and source files If the project fol
219. nctions Relocation Options tab CA78KOR Memory Bank Relocation Options tab CA78KO ROMization Process Options tab CA850 Hex Convert Options tab CA850 Archive Options tab CA850 Section File Generate Options tab CA850 Dump Options tab CA850 Cross Reference Options tab CA850 Memory Layout Visualization Options tab CA850 ROMize Options tab CX Hex Output Options tab CX See the CubeSuite Build for details about this tab R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 124 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE ieee Build Options ta Build Tool nod Saas For a Debug dedicated project 1 Debug Tool node Connect Settings tab Debug Tool Settings tab Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE 78KOR IECUBE V850 Download File Settings tab Flash Options Settings tab MINICUBE V850E2M Hook Transaction Settings tab See the CubeSuite Debug for details about this tab Analyze Tool node Settings tab See the CubeSuite Analysis for details about this tab File node Build Settings tab for C source file assembler source file object module file link directive file symbol information file CX and library file Individual Compile Options tab for C source file Individual Assemble Options tab for assembler source 2 File Information tab
220. nd Perform a clean Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end Start CubeSuite without displaying the Main window and without loading the specified plugins in the Plugins folder In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which each DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plugin names by separating them with commas You can also specify the np option itself multiple times Each DLL will not be loaded If the plugin specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end Start CubeSuite without displaying the Main window and without loading any of the specified plugins in the Plugins folder If this is specified together with the np option then this option
221. nd starts the download process Figure A 4 Download only Page Download only 2 Updates mx KE Downoad CubeSute CubeSurtte VEZ Download size u EE This is update for CubeSuite Detal Update Manager Cubesute Update Manager VREE Download size xxx EB This is update for CubeSuite Update Manager Detail The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Download only From the Select updates page main area click Download only Description of each area 1 Button Download Begins the download This button is disabled if no updates are selected R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 81 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Update Selection area Displays a list of items to update The following information is displayed for each update Category Displays the category of the update Updates with the same category are displayed together Displays the title of the update Displays the download size of the update Displays a summary of the update information Detail This appears if there is detailed information about the update Selecting it will display details in a browser R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 82 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Finish page This page displays
222. nesas Electronics Corporation Product License EXXEXXENYX Module Hame Version Explanation Integrated Development Environment Framework Wocox Dex xex cee Main window of the integrated develop Common Interace for DebugT ool Wkk Dex xxx xxxx Common interface libraries to use Debut Device Information DLL Vico ex xex xxe Common library for getting a device spe BuildT ool Plugin CAS50 Vioxx ex xxx ex BuildT ool plugin to use CASSO CASSO WXX ex xxx 20001 Build T ol 3 BuildT ool Plugin CAF8K0 tees iss ie on BuildT ool plugin to use CAFBKO Build T ool Plugin CA 78 0R Build ool plugin to use CATSKOR TOKO Emulator Plugin a os ao ee Debugl ool plugin to use 78KO Emulator fOKOR Emulator Plugin Yieee ec cece oo DebugT ool plugin to use YEEOR Emutat FOKOR Simulator Plugin Weer Lex xxx xex GebugTool plugin to use 7860A Simula FORO Simulator Plugin Veo ex wxx vex DebugT ool plugin to use Z860 Simulator VWe50 Emulator Plugin Veesex Lex yey xxx GebugT ool plugin to use W850 Emulator Yo50 Simulator Plugin Vie kx xxx yxy DebugT ool plugin to use W850 Simulator Function buttons Copy All Text The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select About Product name Description of each area 1 Product name area Shows
223. ng performed then stop at the top of the function Example of use gt gt gt debugger Step gt gt gt debugger Step StepOption Instrunction R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 317 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Stop This function stops the execution of the debug tool Specification format debugger Stop Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function stops the execution of the debug tool Forcibly halt the program Example of use gt gt gt debugger Stop gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 318 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Binary This function saves the memory data in binary format Specification format debugger Upload Binary fileName address1 address2 force False Argumeni s force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value None Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in binary format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Binary testBinary bin 0x1000 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 319 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Coverage
224. nnections a ou can change the proxy settings used to check and download updates in the JI Internet Options in Control Panel Remark Click the amp or 1 icon to display the CubeSuite Update Manager window Perform the installation in accordance with 2 4 1 The manual update feature step 3 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 31 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 29 CubeSuite Update Manager Window NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates i i All CubeSuite Update Manager j Ua TSKOR KG3 uPD7SF1166 AO ee a CubeSuite Update Manager keeps CubeSutte related software and documents up to date Option Review update history Restore hidden updates Gi Checking updates Chane Geines 4 Please wal Help Exit NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20xx 2 4 3 Canceling an update From the Update in progress dialog box click the Cancel button to cancel the update If the update was canceled then the Finish page will show that the update was canceled When performing an update it is not possible to update currently running related tools or open files For this reason if a related tool is running then the installation will be postponed and the Finish page will indicate that the installation was suspended 2 4 4 Resuming an update When Update Manager or a tool related to CubeSuite supporting the update function is started it checks whether there are suspended ins
225. ns 1 hitialize All Settings Sop ly The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories Category Description General Startup and Exit category Configure startup and shutdown General Display category Configure messages from the application General Text Editor category Configure the text editor General Font and Color category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 169 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ01
226. nt Specification format debugger Breakpoint Set BreakCondition Argumeni s BreakCondition Specify a break condition See BreakCondition for details about creating break conditions Return value The set break event number Detailed description This function sets a break point according to the specifications in BreakCondition Example of use gt gt gt Brean BreakCondition gt gt gt Break Address main gt gt gt breakNumber debugger Breakpoint Set Break gt gt gt print breakNumber R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 278 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Connect This function connects to the debug tool Specification format debugger Connect Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function connects to the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt debugger Connect gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 279 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger DebugTool Change This function changes the debug tool Specification format debugger DebugTool Change debugTool Argumeni s debugTool Specify the debug tool to change The debug tools that can be specified are shown below Type Description Debug Tool Simulator Simulator Debug Tool Minicube MINICUBE Debug T
227. ntroller VSSOESANS ME wPOZ0F3743 1 44pin E PD 7OF3744 1 44pin Product Name uPD70F 3746 a PO FOF 374511 44pin Internal ROM size F bytes 1024 2 ik ALPOFOFS746 1 44pin Internal RAM size bytes 61 440 cH ty VE50ES HES cH ty YS50ES HF3 cH VO50ES HG3 cH iy VE50ES HJ3 E WES5OES AGH 3 a Kind of project Application C amp 850 Project name sample Place C Documents and SettngesMy Documents we Make the project folder CA Documents and Settings Documents ample sample capi Fass the file composition of an existing project to the new project 5 Remark When a subproject is created the title bar says Create Subproject The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 106 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open 1 When creating a main project Click the Start button in the toolbar to open the Start pane and then click the GO button in the Create New Projec area From the File menu select New gt gt Create New Project From the Project menu select Create New Project 2 When creating a subproject From the Project menu select Add gt gt Add New Subproject On the Project Tree panel select project or subproject and then select Add gt gt Add New Subproject from the context menu Des
228. o convert the source files and the like Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 110 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Source Convert Setting dialog box CX This dialog box configures the composition files of the source project the source files and the like to convert them for the build tool of the project to be created Caution This dialog box is only displayed if the build tool of the source project is CA850 and that of the project to be created is CX Figure A 17 Source Convert Setting Dialog Box Source Convert Setting fou can convert the project composition files like source files for the Guild tool of the new project Do you really want to convert source files Onginal source files are overwritten by conversion Backup of project before conversion Backup the project composition files before conversion Place D work sample sample_backup The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Create Project dialog box set the build tool of the source project to CA850 and that of the project to cre ate to CX and then click the Create button Description of each area 1 Source convert selection area Select whether to convert the source files when creating the pro
229. ocontroller Name Displays the updates corresponding to that microcontroller the corresponding action Displays up to five microcontrollers for which the specify microcontroller function was used most recent first Download and install Downloads the selected updates and after the downloads are complete install them Download only Downloads the selected updates only 2 Main area Switch the display to one of the following pages in accordance with the active function Select updates page Download and install page Download only page Finish page History page Restore hidden updates page Error page R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 76 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select updates page This page displays a list of available updates Select updates to download and install Figure A 2 Select updates Page Select updates It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date e EXDownload and install e E Download only 1 Updates OE B CubeSuite E CubeSute Ve me Downoad size soon EE This is update for Cubesuitte Detail The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click All From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Microcontroller Name Description of each area 1 Se
230. oding techniques R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 237 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED 4 5 6 7 8 Build This manual describes the build tools The build tool component is part of CubeSuite It enables various types of information to be configured via a GUI tool This enables you to generate load module files hex format object module files or library files from your source files according to your objectives Debug This manual describes how to control the connection and execution settings of your debug tool It also provides information for when you use the connected debug tool to debug your programs Analysis This manual describes the analyze tools The analysis tool analyzes the source program and information while the program is executing and provides information about the functions and variables Programming This manual describes how to program to the internal Flash memory Message This manual describes output messages R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 238 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS This section describes input conventions D 1 Input Conventions Below are input conventions for configuring information in the panels and dialog boxes provided by CubeSuite 1 Character sets The following character sets are allowed for input Table D 1 List of Cha
231. of the project see E 5 3 Run a clean A clean of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid build Toggles the rapid build function see E 5 4 Runa rapid build between enabled default and disabled Build active project Runs a build of the active project see E 5 1 Run a build If the active project is the main project a build of its Subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project see E 5 2 Runa rebuild If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project see E 5 3 Run a clean If the active project is the main project a clean of its Subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to run a batch build see E 5 5 Runa batch build Build Option List Lists the currently set build options in the Output panel f Debug See the CubeSuite Debug for information about debugging g Flash See the Cu
232. og box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 33 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode i 1 Japanese Shift J15 ka New line code keep curent newline code ka 3 Reload the file Function buttons Cancel The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Encoding of the current file default Default encoding of the current OS Encoding of code page 932 SJIS Encoding of code page 50222 JIS Encoding of code page 51932 EUC Encoding of code page 65001 UTF8 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 153 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Keep current newline code Windows CR LF Macintosh CR Unix LF Keep current newline code is
233. oject This section describes how to add these files to the debug dedicated project E 3 1 Add a download file Add a load module file to the debug dedicated project as the download file to debug A load module file can be added by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file Caution To perform source level debugging step execution in source level units etc a load module file with the symbol information must be added to the debug dedicated project Remarks 1 The specified load module file is reflected automatically on the Download File Settings tab in the Prop erty panel of the debugging tool Also use this Download File Settings tab to configure the load module file type and download options add a hex file or binary file to download additionally as well as the load module file added by this method below See the CubeSuite Debug for details on the downloading 2 V850 Multiple load module files can be added to the debug dedicated project 1 Adding an existing file Drag a load module file from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the Download files node on the project tree Figure E 4 Project Tree Panel Adding a Load Module File Project Tree E F DebugOnly Project JBE uPD7031314 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool Sl E50 Simulator Debug Toy J OB Programmer Flash 7 Drop a load module file here Lab Fite
234. oject file cspj Select the File or Project menu gt gt Save Project When there is a change in the project the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 61 Message Dialog Box Question O0 701002 sample yo5U csp may have been changed by another program Overvurite YD save To continue with the operation click the Yes button on the dialog box The project file is overwritten with the current settings information 2 8 1 Save the project file with a different name You can save the project file with a different name From the File or Project menu select Save Project As the Save Project As dialog box will open Figure 2 62 Save Project As Dialog Box Save Project As O DefaultBuild i O sample ib kiy Recent sample _ve50 Documents sample cspi Desktop My Documents Mo Computer mia My Network Save as type Project File for CubeS uite cepy Ww Specify the save folder and separate project filename cspj on the dialog box The project file is saved in the speci fied folder with the filename Cautions 1 The files registered to the project are the same as those in the original project the files regis tered to the project are not copied R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 60 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 If there is already a subproject file in the same folder and with the same file name excluding the file extension as the
235. ojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location 2 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then builds will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite Build 2 When running a build of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Build active project from the context menu Figure E 29 Build active project Item E Lz SubProject_Cre bug Cirily 5g imma E UPD7031314 Microca E Build SubProject_DebugOnly A Pin Configurator Desi re Rebuild SubProject_DebugOnly Ay Mone Build Tool ce WESO Simulator Debug GE O6 Programmer Flash Sb Open Folder with Explorer d i File add ral Download Files Clean SubProject_BDebugOnly ai Remove Form Project t Shift D el Rename Property R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 255 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 2 Run a rebuild The command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 2 Setting the command when running a clean and then the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the category same as above is executed see 1 Setting the command when running a build This allows you to run a build of all build target files The comm
236. oller 64 Kbytes V850 microcontroller 128 Kbytes The Tool Support Center Contact Information feature will not be available Figure 2 6 License Registration Window Installer step 5 8 License Registration License Fey Registration Please click the button to the right to enter the product license key License Manager The product that pou registered the license can be update via the internet You can check for updates of this setup procedure at the end CubeSuite Click the License Manager button Figure 2 7 CubeSuite License Manager Window CubeSuite License Manager You can add and remove license of CubeSuite and related tools LCs License key is case insensittye and does not contain alpabetical ore Add this License key PO Licenses After you register the license in the CubeSuite License Manager window click the Next button in the License Reg istration Window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 18 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution The installer cannot be manipulated while the CubeSuite License Manager window is running 6 Check the installation targets and installation The settings made in the Development Tools Selection window or Select Components window are appeared Figure 2 8 Installation Settings Confirmation Window Installer step 6 6 Installation Settings Confirmation Setup is now ready to install CubeSuite
237. on format debugger Disconnect Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function disconnects from the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt debugger Disconnect R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 282 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Binary This function downloads a binary file Specification format debugger Download Binary fileName address append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file address Specify a download start address append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only filename and address Return value None Detailed description This function downloads data in binary format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Binary C test testModule bin 0x1000 False gt gt gt debugger Download Binary C test testModule2 bin 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 283 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Binary64Kb This function downloads a binary file in within 64 KB format Specification format debugg
238. on your computer If the newer version is already installed the older version may not be installed Tools for 850 microcontrollers Tools for 78K microcontrollers Emulator USB drivers Install location C Program FilesSWEC Electronics Cubes uite Click Next button to begin installation CubeSuite Check the information and click the Next button Caution Ifa emulator USB driver is installed on Windows Vista or Windows 7 the warning dialog box may appear 7 Confirm the installation progress A progress bar displays the progress of the installation The installation progress of each tool appear in the Install Status area Figure 2 9 Installation Execution Window Installer step 7 6 Installation Execution Install Status CubeS uite Ve 8i lnatalling Installation completed successfully TOKU Compiler CAVE Veeelrstalling Installation completed successtully fOROR Compiler CA78E 0F Yw Installing Installation completed successfully V850 Compiler CA850 Ww ee Installing CubeSuite When all installations of the install targets are finished the Next button becomes enabled R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 19 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Check the information and click the Next button Remark If you click the Abort Installations button a message stating that the user chose to cancel the installa tion appears in the
239. onsolidates and displays all output messages Figure A 25 Output Panel Start build all Friday July Of Start builditsample DetaultBuild D work sample gt D work sample DefaultBuild cxref ana bat Dr ywork samp le main c Dr ywork sample DefaultBuild main a J writing D worki samnplerbetfaultBuildimnairn cref file Build endedtError 0 Warning j Ended Success l Projects Failed O Projects Friday July 3 2009 5 43 31 PH 2 T Program Analyzer A Rapid Build Build Tool The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Output panel dedicated items Edit menu Output panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area Displays messages and the search results output from each tool The All Messages tab consolidates and displays all output messages The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in General Font and Color category in Option dialog box Normal message Agnbtec Character color Information on something Background color Background color White Warning AaBbEc Character color Warning for the operation Background color Normal color Error message Aahher Character color Red Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Bac
240. ontroller area If you register the license of CubeSuite the Update button becomes enabled If your microcontroller is not in the Using microcontroller area click the Update button You can open the CubeSuite Update Manager window and check for microcontroller information updates via the network Select the project type Select the project type to create on Kind of project You can select the item below Application CA850 CX CA78K0 CA78KOR Select this to generate the ROMization module file V850 load module file and hex file by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 43 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Library CA850 CX CA78K0 CA78KOR Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CubeSuite For details on how to create and use this project type debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 4 Specify the project name and location to create the project file Specify the name of the project and the location to create the project file in Project name and Place If you don t create a folder with the project name under the specified location clear the Make the project folder check box Caution When directly entering the
241. ool Minicube2 MINICUBE2 Debug Tool lecube IECUBE Debug Tool lecube2 IECUBE2 Debug Tool E1Jtag E1 JTAG connect Debug Tool E1 Serial E1 Serial connect Return value None Detailed description This function changes to the debug tool specified by Debug Tool However the debug tool that can be changed differs depending on the using device Select Debug Tool on the project tree and select Using Debug Tool on the context menu And then confirm the debug tool that can be changed Example of use gt gt gt debugger DebugTool Change DebugTool Simulator gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 280 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger DebugTool GetType This function displays information about the debug tool Specification format debugger DebugTool GetType Argumeni s None Return value Debug tool type Detailed description This function displays information about the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt debugType debugger DebugTool GetType DebugTool Minicube2 gt gt gt if debugType DebugType Simulator debugger DebugTool Change DebugTool Simulator R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 281 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Disconnect This function disconnects from the debug tool Specificati
242. or Design Tool a Code Generator Design Tool 4 C850 Build Tool che W850 Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Ez Ei File sub Subproject JE uPD70F3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Pel Code Generator Design Tool 4 C4850 Build Tool cee 850 Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Gyl File R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 47 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Manipulate a Project This section describes how to manipulate a project 2 7 1 Open a project Use the following method to open a project Open an existing project Open a recently used project Open a project from the favorites menu 1 Open an existing project Existing projects are opened by specifying the project file From the Project menu select Open Project the Open Project dialog box will open Figure 2 48 Open Project Dialog Box Open Project hy C DefaultBuild n 4 3 sample lib My Recent O sample _v650 Documents sample cspi My Network Files of type Project File for CubeSuite cspj w On the dialog box specify the project file and click the Open button Remark When CubeSuite is not running you can start CubeSuite and load a project by double clicking on that project in Explorer 2 Open a recently used proje
243. or subproject A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild the selected project main project or subproject A rebuild of a sub project is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the selected project main project or subproject A clean of a sub project is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 119 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set to Default Build Option for Sets the current build options as the standard for the project When a subproject is Project added its setting is not made When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its property is displayed in boldface Property Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel 5 When a Download file node is selected This node is displayed only for a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Add Shows the cascading menu to add download files to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project as a download file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a
244. original project folder 1 Sample Project Many sample projects that can be built immediately are provided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 78K0 78KOR V850_ 78kOkx2 5 oft DISCONNECT The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows Start gt gt Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 94 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar This displays common menus Contents of each menu can be customized in User Setting dialog box a File The File menu displays file related menu commands Display a cascading menu of items to create Create New Project Closes the current project and open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new project If the currently open project or its files have been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Opens the Open File dialog box for opening files and projects Displays a cascading menu of items to add Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog bo
245. ote gt See E 5 2 Runa rebuild Clean Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel Clean can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a buildN gt See E 5 3 Run a clean Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with the change of the build setting gt See E 5 4 Run a rapid build Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has gt See E 5 5 Run a batch build Note Itis assumed that a proper command has been set in the Property panel see E 4 1 Set the commands 2 Displaying execution results The execution results of the build standard output and standard error from the external build tool used are dis played in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build gt All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build gt Rapid Build tab Figure E 27 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Output Start build all Thureday May 13 2010 5 54 30 PH Start build SubProject Debug0nly DbefaultBuild al Build endedtError 0 Warning 0 Start build test DefaultBuild EKK JOG BR Program Maintenance Utility Version WEN ocr C CubeSuite Testi 2010 SampleProjects Veso 8s0std Debugtnly nake Copyright iC KKK KWK WWW WWWX All rights reserved Build endediError 0 Warning 0 Ended i Success l Projects Failed 0 Proj
246. ovided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 76K0 78KOR ve5d fokOrk 3 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 42 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 2 Create a new project Create a new project From the Project menu select Create New Project the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 43 Create Project Dialog Box When First Started Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller ie VESOES AI3 WE pPD OF 374311 44pin a pPD FOF 3744 1 44pin Product Name uPD OF 3746 EE wPD FOF S745 1 44pir Internal ROM size K bytes 1024 w wPO FOF 3746 1 44pin Internal RAM size bytes 67 440 ie VE5SOES HES He VB50ES HF3 CH ie VE50ES HG3 CH VE50ES HI3 W YES0ES G3 H Eind of project Application A850 ka Flace C Documents and Settings My Documents w Make the project folder tis shown absolute path ofa project fle torete o Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Sue ee Set the items in the order below 1 2 3 Select the microcontroller type Select the microcontroller type to use in the project on Microcontroller You can select the item below V850 78KOR 78K0 Select the microcontroller Select the microcontroller to use in the project on the Using microc
247. owse button and in the Select External Text Editor dia log box specify the name of the executable file b Startup options Specify the startup options for the external text editor up to 256 characters The startup option variables that can be specified here are as follows If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces File Passes the name of the file to display with absolute path to the external text editor LInNe Passes the caret position line number to the external text editor 6 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 176 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 177 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Font and Color category Use this category to configure general settings relating to fonts and colors on each panel Figure A 44 Option Dialog Box General Font and Color Category L L General Startup and Exit Display Text Editor setting place Fol etna Cet Default Use default color External ools Warnine a Build Debug Fr
248. ox click the New button Description of each area 1 Toolbar name Type in the name of the new toolbar directly via the keyboard UltraToolbar1 is specified by default 2 Location Select the location for the new toolbar from the following drop down list The location specified here is the location where the new toolbar will appear immediately after it is created tool bars can be moved freely by dragging and dropping Displays the toolbar at the top of the Main window default Floating Displays the toolbar above the Main window without docking it R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 199 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Creates a new toolbar with the specified information and closes this dialog box The new toolbar appears in the list on the User Setting dialog box s Toolbars tab with its check box selected Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 200 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rename Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the name of a toolbar created by the user Figure A 55 Rename Toolbar Dialog Box Rename Toolbar Cancel The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box
249. ox This dialog box is used to display versions of CubeSuite and each plug in product Contact Information for Technical Support dialog This dialog box is used to display necessary information to contact to Tool box Support Center One Point Advice dialog box This dialog box is used to display tips for using CubeSuite Other amp Windows dialog box This dialog box is used to select one of the divide panels shown in the Main window to activate or close Open Project dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing project or select the project file to designate the project to divert when creating a new project Add Existing Subproject dialog box This dialog box is used to select subprojects for adding existing subprojects to projects Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder or file output destination e g source code or report file for the caller of this dialog box Save Project As dialog box This dialog box is used to save project files as different names Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Select Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external tool Select External Text Editor dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external text editor Python Console panel This panel is used to use IronPython to control CubeSuite and the debug tool via
250. pdate Manager Uption 1l Others A User Infomation Function buttons initialize All Settings Apply The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Check for updates when opening project Automatically checks for updates when a project is opened B Does not automatically check for updates when a project is opened 2 Check at intervals of Specify the interval at which to check for updates Either enter a number between 0 and 99 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the buttons 3 Buttons Update Manager Option Displays the Update Manager Options dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 189 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 190 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other User Information category Use this category to configure other setting relating to user information Figure A 50 Option Dialog Box Other User Information Category Option al General S
251. play Area Tips for using CubeSuite are randomly shown edit not allowed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 212 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Page feed area The current page number in this dialog box and the buttons for page feed are shown Button Function Back One previous page is shown The button is disabled when the first page is shown One next page is shown The button is disabled when the last page is shown 3 Do not show this dialog box at startup This configuration is saved as the one for the active user Does not open this dialog box automatically at startup Opens this dialog box automatically at startup when Main window appears default Remark This property can also be set from the Option dialog box under the General Startup and Exit cate gory Function buttons Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 213 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other amp Windows dialog box This dialog box is used to select one of the divide panels shown in the Main window to activate or close Figure A 62 Other amp Windows Dialog Box Other amp Windows malnm C 4 i start s boot Close Windows intkab s main s sub 5 crte s system User 1 svsberninit c Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open
252. project are in the different drive it is not displayed Default Relative path from the main project How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the subproject file to save the information on them Default Absolute name of subprojects How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 128 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save with absolute path Select whether to save the subproject information to a subproject file using the absolute path How to change Select a value from the drop down list Ristriction Saves the file using the absolute path Saves the file using the relative path 2 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to subprojects Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Ristriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 129 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Microcontroller Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on microcontrollers configured in the project categorized by the fo
253. project from that project select the Subproject node on the project tree and select Remove from Project on the context menu In addition the subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system Figure 2 54 Remove from Project Item LE sub Subproject IPE uPDTOFS746 A Fin Configura tl Rebuild sample En t i Code Genera Clean sample 4 CASSO Build as V8S0 Simulat Open Folder with Explorer a Program AnA Add y QB Programn Dl File iq Set sub as Active Project C pd Remove from Project Shift Del E Build sample 2 7 5 Change the project name You can change the name of the project main project or subproject on the project tree Select the Project node or Subproject node and select Rename on the context menu Figure 2 55 Rename Item For a Project H Build sample H Rebuild sample a Clean sample chs V85O Simulat Open Folder with Explorer ey Program AnNa Add a OB Pragram Save Project and CubeSuite as Package Remark After changing the project name when you save the project the actual name of the project file is also changed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 51 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 6 Open a project folder in Explorer You can open the folder where the project file for a project main project or subproject is saved from the project tree in Explorer Select the Project node or Subproject node and select Open
254. ption This function clears the mapping settings Example of use gt gt gt debugger Map Clear gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 304 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Map Information This function displays map information Specification format debugger Map Information Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function displays map information number start address end address access size memory type Example of use gt gt gt debugger Map Information 1 Ox00000000 0x0005FFFF 32 Internal ROM area 2 Ox00060000 OxX03FF6FFF 8 Non map area 3 OxO3FF7000 Ox03FFEFFF 32 Internal RAM area 4 OXO03FFFO00 OxO3FFFFFF 8 SFR R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 305 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Map Set This function configures memory mapping Specification format debugger Map Set mapType addressl1 address2 accessSize Argumeni s mapType Specify a memory type The memory types that can be specified are shown below Specify a map start address a map start Specify a map start address accessSize Specify an access size bit default 8 For V850 specify either 8 16 or 32 For 78KOR IECUBE specify either 8 or 16 Specify the chip select default not specified
255. r 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 27 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj a Text file bt All files 2 A Subfolder level to search The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be added to the project You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj o Text file txt All files R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 143 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project 1 is displayed by default Remark Up to 10 decimal number
256. racter Sets ASCII Single byte numbers letters and punctuation Shift JIS Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji and single byte Katakana UTF 8 Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji including Chi nese and single byte Katakana EUC JP Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji and single byte Katakana 2 Numbers Numbers may be input in the following base formats Table D 2 List of Number Bases Starts with 1 to 9 followed by a sequence of the digits 0 to 9 and 0 Hexadecimal number Starts with Ox followed by a sequence of the digits 0 to 9 and the letters a to f As for capital letter small letter of the alphabet it is pretermission R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 239 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS D 2 Displaying Icons at Locations of Input Errors Some of the panels and dialog boxes provided by CubeSuite display warnings when there is an input error or a required item is missing they display g icons at the locations of input errors where illegal characters were entered indi cating that the necessary information was not entered Remark Move the mouse cursor over the J icon to view information about the required input string tips to fix the error in a popup message Figure D 1 Sample Icons Shown at Locations of Input Errors Path Edit Path One path p
257. rameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only filename and offset Return value None Detailed description This function downloads data in hex format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Hex testModule hex gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 287 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Hex64Kb This function downloads a hex file in within 64 KB format Specification format debugger Download Hex64Kb fileName offset 0 append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only filename and offset Return value None Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads hex files in within 64 KB format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Hex6 4Kb testModule hex gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 288 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download HexBank This function downloads a hex file in memory bank format Specification form
258. ration and when categories are nested 20 levels Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 120 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 When a file is selected Only menu items that are displayed when a file for a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL is selected are shown here See the CubeSuite Build for the information about a file for a project other than a debug dedicated project Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see f Running the editor Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Selected Application Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated application Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to
259. replace is switched when a tab is selected This dialog box has the following tabs Quick Search tab Whole Search tab Quick Replace tab Whole Replace tab 2 Search replace criteria setting area Detailed criteria for searching replacing is set Please see the description of the relevant tabs for details of the contents how to set Function buttons Buttons for execute search replace Please see the description of the relevant buttons for details R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 155 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Search tab This tab searches the designated characters and moves the caret to the searched position with the position being selected Note that this tab will be disabled if you call the Search and Replace dialog box from a panel other than the Output panel Editor panel Figure A 35 Search and Replace Dialog Box Quick Search Tab search and Replace 1 abe Ww 3 Search location Curent panel main c w Option search criteria Plain text we Gase sensitive Word by word Open file before replacing Function buttons Search Backward Search Forward The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Search From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Searc
260. ress implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the informa
261. rg2 main arg3 3 You can change the order in which parameters are specified by using the format parameter name default value Example Ifthe Specification format is function arg1 arg2 1 arg3 True gt gt gt function arg3 False argil main arg2 3 OK gt gt gt function False main 3 NG because it is assumed that argil False arg2 main arg3 3 R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 264 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS CubeSuiteExit This function exits from CubeSuite Specification format CubeSuiteExit Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function exits from CubeSuite Caution The project file will not be saved even if it has been modified Example of use gt gt gt CubeSuiteExit R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 265 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function displays the help for the CubeSuite Python functions Specification format Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function starts CubeSuite s integrated help and displays the help for CubeSuite Python functions Example of use gt gt gt Help R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 266 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS
262. ria by directly entering the file name in the text box maximum characters 1024 If this is the case the wildcard can be used and multiple file names can be specified by separating them with 3 Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list c Case sensitive Searches with the designated characters in case sensitive Searches with the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Word by word Searches with a designated exact word Searches with at least one of the words default e Open file before replacing Replace is done after opening the file to search replace characters in the Editor panel Replace is done without opening the file to search replace characters default Function buttons Option Option Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab 0 between display hide the Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab area in this tab Replace Searches characters with designated criteria in batch and replaces the searched charac ters to the one designated to be replaced Caneel Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box setting and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 167 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This
263. roject that you want to open exists When you first copy a project the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Specify the project file name that you want to open R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 215 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the file type file type of the project file you want to open a When the dialog box is opened from Project menu Project file for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Work space file prw for PM Work space file for PM Project file prj for PM Project file for PM b When the dialog box is opened from the Create Project dialog box Project file for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Subproject file for CubeSuite cssp Subproject file for CubeSuite Function buttons Open When the dialog box is opened from Project menu Opens the specified project file When the dialog box is opened from the Create Project dialog box Specifies the selected project file to Project to be passed in the caller dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 216 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 4
264. round This icon indicates that the application is checking for updates This icon indicates that a download is in progress The progress is shown as a percentage This is an update notification icon It also displays the details of the notification with the Ap icon Click it to display the CubeSuite Update Manager window R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 91 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite License Manager window This window displays a list of licenses and adds and deletes licenses Figure A 13 CubeSuite License Manager Window CubeSuite License Manager Seis ou can add and remove license of CubeSuite and related tools Ls License key is case insensitive and does not contain alpabetical cleo Add this License key po Licenses CubeSuite for 78K Standard Edition Function buttons CubeSuite for 78K Standard Edition License kep mamm me atte MM 3 Seral number Meee The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite License Manager Upon installation in the License registration window click License Manager Description of each area 1 Add this License key area Enter a license key in this area 2 Licenses area This area displays
265. rrently being opened is not selected in the Project Tree panel 7 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 174 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Text Editor category Use this category to configure general settings relating to the text editor Figure A 43 Option Dialog Box General Text Editor Category E ty Status and Exit eneral Text Editor Display 1 Sut Editor Show space marks 2 Show control codes 3 B Distinct display for CA LF CA and LF 4 Use external text editor External text editor External text editor path C Program Files MW SM EE Browse 5 Startup options aFlez Linez 2F ile File path Line Line number 6 Hi lnitialize Settings Function buttons initialize All Settings Apply The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons
266. rty panel select the following property and then click the button The Common Options tab The Intermediate file output folder of the Output File Type and Path category The Output folder of the Frequently Used Options for Link category CA78K0 CA78KOR The Output folder for hex file of the Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category CA78KO CA78KOR The Output folder for ROMized object file of the Frequently Used Options for ROMization category CA850 The Output folder for hex file of the Frequently Used Options for Hex Convert category CA850 The Output folder for section file of the Frequently Used Options for Section File Generate category CA850 The Output folder of the Frequently Used Options for Link category CX R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 219 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The Error message file output folder of the Error Output category CX The Temporary folder of Others category The Link Options tab CA78KO CA78KOR The Output folder of the Output File category The Object Convert Options tab CA78K0 CA78KOR The Output folder for hex file of the Hex File category The Create Library Options tab CA78KO CA78KOR The Output folder of the Output File category The Memory Bank Relocation Options tab CA78KO The Output folder for function information file th
267. rved word AabbCe The reserved words of your compiler assembler are displayed in this color in Background color Default color pe the Editor panel Comment Sabie Font color Comments in the case of a C source file are displayed in this color in the Background color Default color l pray Editor panel String literal SaBbbtiec String literals are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background color Default color p Control code gabc Control characters are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background color Default color p Highlight Highlighted areas in plug in products and the like are displayed in this color Background color Magenta man Changed value Aahbte Values changed via the execution of a user program are displayed in this color Background color Cream pas per in the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel SFR panel Watch panel Edit value AabbCe Blue Values forcibly modified by the user are displayed in this color in the Memor Background color Default color ed 4 panel CPU Register panel Local Vari ables panel SFR panel Watch panel Current PC The row with the current PC position is displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background color LightOrange ma P Breakpoint AHR The line at which a break point is set is displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background color SalmonPink pay p Update periodic Sabbte Areas configured for real tim
268. s Adds the specified subproject to a project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 218 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder or file output destination e g source code or report file for the caller of this dialog box Figure A 65 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder Select the Folder to package project and tool Desktop E3 My Documents og My Computer E A My Network Places j Recycle Bin Function buttons Make Mew Folder a Ok The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Project menu select Save Project and CubeSuite as Package On the Project Tree panel select the Project node and then Save Project and CubeSuite as Package from the context menu In the Whole Search tab or Whole Replace tab of the Search and Replace dialog box click the button In the Create Project dialog box click the Browse button in Place in the project file area In the Source Convert Setting dialog box CX click the Browse button in the Backup of project before conver sion area In the Add File dialog box click the Browse button in the Place area In the Path Edit dialog box click the Browse button in Path One path per one line in path edit area On the Prope
269. s The execution result of the cleans is displayed on the Output panel After the cleans are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 151 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to the designated location Figure A 32 Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Move To Description of each area 1 Line number Symbol area Specify the line number decimal number or symbol name of the location to which the caret is moved You can directly enter the characters into the text box or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 Function buttons OK Displays the designated location at the middle of the target panel display and moves the caret there Cancel Cancels the criteria and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 152 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dial
270. s True Verify during writes False Do not verify during writes Return value The set value Caution Ifa PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project Detailed description This property switches the write time verification setting Example of use gt gt gt print debugger Memory NoVerify False gt gt gt debugger Memory NoVerify True gt gt gt print debugger Memory NoVerify True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 343 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Opiton Coverage debugger Option OpenBreak debugger Option Timer debugger Option Trace debugger Option UseTraceData This property sets or reference the options of the debug tool Specification format debugger Opiton Coverage coverage debugger Option OpenBreak openBreak debugger Option Timer timer debugger Option Trace trace debugger Option UseTraceData useTraceDataType Argumeni s coverage Specify whether to use the coverage function True Use the coverage function False Do not use the coverage function openBreak Specify whether to use the open break function True Use the open break function False Do not use the open break function timer Specify whether to use the timer f
271. sages will be shown in the tooltip More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be maximum number of restriction in the property that specified called this dialog box Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 145 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 29 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Build Options tab of the Property panel select either one of the following properties and then click the button The Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category The Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category Description of each area 1 Text area Edit texts in multiple lines By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected in this area
272. select Add gt gt Add New Subproject on the context menu the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 46 Create Project Dialog Box When Adding a New Subproject Create Subproject Microcontroller Using microcontroller fe VE50ES AW3 ME wPO70F3743 1 44pin JE wPD70F3744 1 44pin Product Name uPD7OF 3746 EE uP FOF 3745 1 44pin Internal ROM size K bytes 1024 p uPDFOE3746 1 44pin Internal RAM size bytes 671 440 He VE50E5 HES He VB50ES HF3 Cle VE50ES HG3 CH VE50ES HI3 i ae VESOESAIGS H Kind of project Application A850 ka Flace OD work sample w Make the project folder tis shown absolute path ofa project fle torete o C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project input project fietodvers After setting each item on the dialog box click the Create button For more on the settings for each item see 2 6 2 Create a new project Remark You can create a subproject with CX as the build tool by reusing the file structure of a subproject with CA850 as the build tool see 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project The project tree after adding the subproject will look like the one below R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 46 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 47 Project Tree Panel After Adding a Subproject Project Tree Ed E E sample Project BE UFO70F3746 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurat
273. set forth herein LICENSOR grants to LICENSEE non exclusive and non transferable rights with no right to sublicense to others except as expressly set forth below to use the Licensed Program on the computer system s Specified System up to the designated number Designated Number Irn a Do you accept to the end user license agreement Accept CubeSuite B ent Check the information and if you agree it select Accept then click the Next button Caution If you select Do not accept you cannot continue with the installation R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 16 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Select the install target and the installation location Select the check boxes of the install target If you wish to change the installation location edit it in the Install location area Figure 2 4 Development Tools Selection Window S Installer step 3 6 Development Tools Selection Please specify the development tools to install Tools for 850 microcontrollers Drivel Free space sxx KB Required space xxx KB Emulator USB drivers Install location C Program Files HEC Electronics Cubes uite CubeSuite After you select the install target and installation location click the Next button Cautions 1 If you wish to install the code generation plug in click the Details button to select it in the Select Components window 2 You canno
274. ssible to specify only filename and address Return value None Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads binary files in memory bank format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download BinaryBank C test testModule bin 0x1000 False gt gt gt debugger Download BinaryBank C test testModule2 bin 0x2000 True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 285 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Coverage This function downloads coverage data Specification format debugger Download Coverage fileName Argumeni s Return value None Detailed description This function downloads coverage data Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Coverage testModule csrcv gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 286 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Hex This function downloads a hex file Specification format debugger Download Hex fileName offset 0 append False Argumeni s fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then all three pa
275. t has Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run Figure A 31 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Build mode Defined macros DetaultBuild BuildMode DefaultBuild BuildMode Project The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area This area displays the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project their build modes and their macro definitions a Project This area displays the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and their build modes which you wish to run a build When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 150 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Build mode This area displays
276. t OS 64 bit OS Business Edition Enterprise Edition Windows 7 82 bit OS 64 bit OS NET Framework NET Framework 2 0 Windows XP NET Framework 3 0 Windows Vista NET Framework 3 5 1 Windows 7 Remark NET Framework 3 5 Client Profile is not supported Runtime library of Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher Remark Installation of the latest service pack is recommended 3 Supported target environments Emulator IECUBE IECUBE2 On chip debug emulators MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Simulator R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 14 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes how to install CubeSuite how to use the license management and update feature and the pro cedure from launching CubeSuite to starting development 2 1 Installing CubeSuite This section describes how to install CubeSuite 1 Insert the CD ROM into the drive The Preparing to Install page appears automatically Figure 2 1 Preparing to Install Page the Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools installer Readme First CubeSuite Thank you for purchasing Cubesuite The following document provides information about CubeSuite development tool components This includes summaries and operating precautions Please read this document before using CubeSuite Read me first Readme PDF will not b
277. t change the install location on a host machine where CubeSuite have been installed If you wish to change the installation location uninstall CubeSuite then perform the installation Remark If you wish to specify the install target in detail click the Details button The Select Components win dow appears The Component Selection area shows the details of the install target you selected in the Development Tools Selection window After select the check boxes of the tools in the Component Selection area click the Next button Figure 2 5 Select Components Window Installer step 4 8 Select Components Component Selection Product Name Size CubeSuite x xx Must Install xxx KB FOKO Compiler C478K0 Vx xx xxx KB 7SK0R Compiler CA78K0R Vx xx xxx KB 850 Compiler C4850 x xx xxx KB M Stack Usage Tracer Vx xx xxx KB Explanation Diva C Free space xxx KB Required space xxx KB Install location C Program Files NEC Electronics CubeSuite CubeSuite R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 17 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution The check boxes of products that must be installed cannot be cleared 5 Enter your license key Registering a license will remove the following limitations Update Manager will not be available Below are the maximum code sizes that can be developed 78KO microcontroller 32 Kbytes 78KOR microcontr
278. t file name If an unnecessary parameter is specified and the script file cannot be loaded then an error will be displayed and the script file will not be executed A sample script file is shown below debugger Connect debugger Download LoadModule r C project test DefaultBuild test out debugger Register GetValue pc breakpoint BreakCondition breakpoint Address func debugger Breakpoint Set breakpoint debugger Go GoOption WaitBreak debugger Register GetValue pc R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 72 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the windows panels and dialog boxes related to installation updates license settings and starting CubeSuite A 1 Description Below is a list of the windows panels and dialog boxes related to installation updates license settings and starting CubeSuite Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box List Task Tray When the application is checking for or downloading updates in the back ground an icon appears in the Windows task tray CubeSuite License Manager window This window displays a list of licenses and adds and deletes licenses Main window This is the start up window that opens when CubeSuite is launched This panel allows you to easily open a tutorial access create open a project or load a sample project Create Project dialog box This
279. t information including source file structure build options and settings for connecting to the debug tool 2 Design The pin assignment function makes it possible to output reports called device pin list and device top view as files by inputting the pin configuration status of the microcontroller The code generation functionN can output source code device driver programs corresponding to peripheral functions provided by the microcontroller e g systems ports and interrupt by selecting and entering the informa tion required for control in the CubeSuite panels Note The code generation function is an optional feature 3 Coding A tree view of the files included in the project appears in a CubeSuite panel and the files can be edited by linking various editors to CubeSuite 4 Build You can configure optimization and other build options in the CubeSuite panels enabling you to create efficient load module files and a library file R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 11 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 5 6 7 8 Remark Itis also possible to link to an external build tool and use it instead of the build tool provided by CubeSuite see APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Debug You can display your debugging tool s connection settings and debugging information in CubeSuite panels There are also many methods for executing programs enabling you to debug your progra
280. tOption Specify the execution unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description NextOption Source Source line unit default NextOption Instruction Instruction unit Return value None Detailed description This function performs procedure step execution If a function call is being performed then stop after the function executes Example of use gt gt gt debugger Next gt gt gt debugger Next NextOption Instrunction gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 311 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Register GetValue This function references register IO register SFR Specification format debugger Register GetValue regName Argumeni s Specify the register name to reference Return value The referenced value Detailed description This function displays the value of the register specified by regName Example of use gt gt gt edebugger Register Get Value pc 0x100 gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue p01 RB1 0x20 gt gt gt debugger Register SetValue pc 0x200 gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x200 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 312 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Register SetValue This function sets the value of a register IO register
281. tallations If there are suspended installations then if a related tool is running a Message dialog box appears After closing the tool click the Retry button If a related tool is not running a Message dialog box appears Click the Yes button Update Manager will perform the update After the update is performed the CubeSuite Update Manager window closes and the tool that was shut down is restarted R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 32 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 5 Displaying the update history In the menu area of the CubeSuite Update Manager window select Review update history The History page appears From this page you can install download files including uploading to another PC or delete them Figure 2 30 History Page CubeSuite Update Manager EEJ NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates l ba All G History 5 N TSKOR KGS uPD78F1166_A0 You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs to Update update Download and install Select all Download only p Legend Download E Instal O Successi suspended Failed Option Review update history Title State Date Restore hidden updates Device Information V850ES Sx2 Vexx Detal Monday January xx xxxx max AM O Device Information 7BKOREx Vem Monday January xx EEEE EEHEEHE AM OES CubeSuite Update Manager Vx x g Monday January xx EEEE cme AM Help O
282. tartup and E sit Display Text Editor Font and Color External Tools Build Debug dy Update E E Others hitialize All Settings User Information 2 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Information area a User information area This area displays a list of user information Other User Information Input the user information User infor mation Name Tnfor mation User Infor mation Company Department Username E mail Telephone number Fax number Additional information Sales Information The content in the Information field can be edited To edit the information select one of the items from the list click the Edit button and then type the information directly into the text box up to 256 characters R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 191 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Buttons Edits the content of the selected Information item by typing directly in the text box This button is disabled if nothing is selected in the list 2 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note ho
283. te see the CubeSuite Build 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure E 32 Clean active project Item a 8 5 AL E Sls T J Clean SubProject_DebugOnly 850 Simulator Dedw rP QB Programmer Flash Sb Open Folder with Explorer a File add ral Download Files 7 ai Remove Form Project t Shift Del Rename Property R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 257 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 4 Run a rapid build A rapid build is a function that a build see E 5 1 Run a build is started automatically when one of the following events occurs When the C source file assembler source file or header file that has been added to the debug dedicated project is updated When the C source file assembler source file or header file is added to or removed from the debug dedicated project When the properties in the Property panel of the debug dedicated project are changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default Figure E 33 Rapid Build item When a rapid build Is valid When a rapid build Is invalid Build Build E Build Project F7 E Build Project F7 Ge Rebuild Project Shi
284. ted in this dialog box 2 Folder location area Select a folder to set in the caller of this dialog box or a folder to which to output files e g source code and report files The folder selected by default differs depending on the caller a Project menu and Project Tree panel C Documents and Settings user name My Documents is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time b Search and Replace dialog box Source Convert Setting dialog box and Add File dialog box The folder set in the caller is selected When the field is blank or the path which does not exist is entered the project folder is selected instead c Create Project dialog box The folder set in the caller is selected When the field is blank or the path which does not exist is entered C Documents and Settings user name My Documents is selected instead d Path Edit dialog box and Property panel The project folder is selected e CubeSuite Update Manager window C Documents and Settings user name Desktop is selected Function buttons p Button ee ee New Folder a a new folder in the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New folder The designated folder path is set to the path that this dialog box is called from The folder selected in the Folder location area is set as the file output destination Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00
285. ter is changeed O DN oO of After time specified by XRunBreak has elapsed Example Sample script file def pythonConsoleCallback Id if Id 63 Processing you want to perform after time specified by XRunBreak has elapsed Example of use gt gt gt Hook testScriptFile2 py R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 268 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function saves all editing files and projects Specification format Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function saves all editing files and projects Example of use gt gt gt Save gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 269 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function runs a script file Specification format Source scriptFile Argumeni s scriptFile Specify the script file to run Return value None Detailed description This function runs the script file specified by scriptFile Example of use gt gt gt Source testScriptFile2 py gt gt gt Source E TestFile TestScript testScriptFile py gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 270 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Address This function evaluates an address expression
286. the command input method CubeSuite Uninstaller window This window is used to specify one or more installed CubeSuite products to uninstall at once R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 74 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite Update Manager window This window displays the status of and controls the update function Figure A 1 CubeSuite Update Manager Window T CubeSuite Update Manager NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates an All CubeSuite Update Manager TSKOR KG3 uPD7SF1166 AO ee l CubeSuite Update Manager keeps CubeSuite related software and documents up to date Option Review update history Restore hidden updates Gy Checking updates Change settings 4 Please wait Help Exit NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 205x The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Update Manager From the CubeSuite Help menu select Check for Updates In the Windows task tray click the 8 or i icon R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 75 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu area This area displays a menu for changing the appearance and settings of the main area Select an item to perform Displays the updates Micr
287. the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The file itself is not deleted from the file system Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the selected characters are copied to the clipboard Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 121 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
288. this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Remarks 1 When more than one components are selected the context menu of the last selected component is displayed 2 The context menu of the currently selected component is displayed in the blank area under the project tree R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 122 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Also the settings of the selected node can be changed This also shows the type of the Generate Code button clicked in the Code Generator panel and information about the file selected in the Code Generator Preview panel and changes settings Figure A 19 Property Panel Property 1 E sample Property Hotes File name 3 This ie the name of the file to which the information of this main project is to be The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Help menu Property panel dedicated items Context menu How to open Select either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Too
289. tion included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc
290. tion registered to an existing project Open Existing Project Loads the project of Cubesuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Nothing Nothing pen Exi ting PM rrojeci The PM projects for 78K0R 78K0 V850 of PM version 6 00 and later can be loaded directly The loaded projects are converted to a project for CubeSuite for each project group and new project files are created in the original project folder Many sample projects that can be built immediately are provided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 76K0 78KOR ve50 78k0rkx3 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open On the toolbar click the Gi Stat button From the menu bar select Window gt gt Start Description of each area 1 Learn About CubeSuite area a Learn About CubeSuite Click the button to show a tutorial aimed at improving your understanding of CubeSuite R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 104 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Create New Project area a Create New Project Click the button to open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new CubeSuite project file 3 Open Existing Project area a Recently Project This area displays
291. tions button a message stating that the user chose to cancel the uninstallation appears in the progress details area 3 Confirm the results of the uninstallation When all setup related tasks are finished the results of the uninstallation appear Figure 2 13 Uninstallation Completion Window Result ac Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the tems to be uninstalled Product Uninstallation completed successfully CubeSuite Stack Usage Tracer Uninstalling Uninstallation completed successfully CubeSuite Update Manager Uninstalling Uninstallation completed successfully All installations were completed successtully eo CubeSuite Click the Exit button to complete the uninstallation Caution Ifall products are uninstalled the CubeSuite Uninstaller will be also uninstalled automatically R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 22 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Using the License Management Feature The license management feature registers and manages newly acquired licenses for CubeSuite and related tools on the host machine by starting the CubeSuite License Manager window using the method below From the Windows the Start menu select Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite License Manager Upon installation in the License registration window click the License Manager button The following functionality will b
292. tor dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external text editor Figure A 69 Select External Text Editor Dialog Box select External Text Editor YP took My Recent My videos Documents G sample i E Desktop My Documents 38 My Computer Files of type Program files exe w OOo Function buttons S V The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the General Text Editor category of the Option dialog box click the Browse button in the External text edi tor area Description of each area 1 Look in Select the location folder of the executable file for the external text editor to register from the drop down list 2 List of files This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in and Files of type 3 File name Specify the name of the executable file for the external text editor R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 230 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type Select the type of the executable file for the external text editor to register from the following drop down list Program files exe Executable format default All files All formats Function buttons Species he selocied ile in the Option dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box
293. tor pane and edit the contents of the file directly Note that the files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c Assembler source file asm s Header file h inc Symbol information file sfg Link directive file dir dr Link map file map Hex file hex Text file txt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 244 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Caution To perform source level debugging a load module file with the symbol information must be added as a download file to debug see E 3 1 Add a download file Remarks 1 By dragging a file and dropping it onto the Editor panel you can open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel 2 When the environment is set to use an external editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS C source files and other files can be added by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add an individual files Drag a file s from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the File node on the project tree Figure E 7 Project Tree Panel Adding a File Project Tree E E DebugOnly Project ME uPD7031314 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool
294. type is other than a debug dedicated project CubeSuite Build When the target project type is a debug dedicated project E 5 Runa Build 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Output panel Please see each panel section for the details of the contents of the display R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 102 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Function keys bar Shows the function keys assigned to the currently active window and the function keys available in the main win dow Hover the mouse cursor over a function key button to display a message about that button 5 Statusbar Shows a brief explanation of the currently selected menu item and the various information necessary to debug etc See the CubeSuite Debug for details R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 103 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Start panel This panel allows you to open a tutorial access create open a project and load a sample project with single click CubeSuite Figure A 15 Start Panel earn Abot ubeDuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSute The tutorial contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite Create New Pi A new project can be created new project can also be created by reusing the file configura
295. ubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the items to be uninstalled i Select all Unselect all Product CubeSuite CAFSKO Vex CubeSuite CATOKOR WXX CubeSuite Code Generator Common Abort Uninstallatio CubeSuite Device Information 8 List CubeSuite Device Information 86 0 Package CubeSuite Device Information 78K0A Package CubeSuite Emulator Utilities hel CoheSuite lateqrated Heln CubeSuite Click the Select all button to select all the check boxes Click the Unselect all button to clear all the check boxes Click the Uninstall button 2 Confirm the uninstallation progress A progress bar displays the progress of the uninstallation The uninstallation progress of each tool appear in the progress details area Figure 2 12 Uninstallation Execution Window Progress eo Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the tems to be uninstalled Product Cube Suite CubeSuite 478K Vos CubeSuite CAFSKOR vor CubeSuite Code Generator Common CubeSuite Device Information 78K List CubeSuite Device Information 78K0 Package CubeSuite Device Information 78K0A Package CubeSuite Emulator Utilities wl CoheSuite lateqrated Heln CubeSuite Uninstalling Uninstallation completed successfully CubeSuite CATORO Voce Uninstalling CubeSuite R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 21 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If you click the Abort Uninstalla
296. ug in name JA npall A plug in optionA plug in parameter Aproject file name A One or more spaces Can be omitted When options are separated by pipeline characters any one of the options can be specified Pattern in proceeding can be repeated Each option is described below None Launch CubeSuite without displaying the Main window and exit without perform ing any actions bbA build mode name Execute a build Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end brA build mode name Execute a rebuild Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the D
297. ugger Assemble Disassemble main 5 False 0x00004088 br TestInit 0x8e OxO0000408A mov Oxa r11 OxO0000408C movea 0x19 r0 r13 Ox00004090 mov r13 r12 0Ox00004092 wmovhi O0xffff gp r1 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 272 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Assemble LineAssemble This function performs line assembly Specification format debugger Assemble LineAssemble address code Argumeni s address Specify the address at which to start assembly code Specify the string to assemble Return value None Detailed description This function performs assembly of the string specified by code from the address specified by address If is specified in address then it is interpreted as the address following the last address assembled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 0x00004088 F545 br TestInit 0x8e gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble OxO0000408A OA5A mov Oxa r11 gt gt gt debugger Assemble LineAssemble main mov r13 r12 gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 1 False Ox00004088 mov r13 r12 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 273 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Delete This function deletes a break point Specification format
298. ugger Go This function continues program execution Specification format debugger Go goOption GoOption Normal Argumeni s goOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description GoOption lgnoreBreak Execute ignoring breakpoints GoOption WaitBreak Wait until program stops GoOption Normal Breakpoints enabled do not wait until program stops default Return value None Detailed description This function continues program execution If goOption is specified the processing is performed in accordance with the specification Example of use gt gt gt debugger Go gt gt gt debugger Go GoOption WaitBreak gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 299 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger le GetValue debugger le SetValue This function sets references the IE register or DCU register Specification format debugger Ie GetValue ieType address debugger Ie SetValue ieType address value Argumeni s ieType Specify a register Return value debugger le GetValue is the register value There is no debugger le SetValue Detailed description debugger le GetValue displays the value of the register specified by address The register type is specified by ie Type debugger le SetValue writes value to the register specified by address The register type
299. unction True Use the timer function False Do not use the timer function trace Specify whether to use the trace function True Use the trace function False Do not use the trace function useTraceDataType Specify which function to use the trace data in V850 IECUBE The functions that can be specified are shown below Use TraceDataType Trace UseTraceDataType Coverage Return value The set value Caution Ifa PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 344 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Detailed description This property sets or reference the options of the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt print debugger Option UseTraceData Trace gt gt gt debugger Option UseTraceData UseTraceDataType Coverage gt gt gt print debugger Option Coverage False gt gt gt debugger Option Coverage True gt gt gt print debugger Option Coverage True gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 345 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTrace Addup debugger XTrace Complement debugger XTrace Mode This property sets or reference the tracing options of the debug tool Spec
300. up to four of the most recently used project file names project names b Favorite project This area displays up to four of the project file names project names in your favorites c Open Existing Project Click the button to open the Open Project dialog box in order to open an existing CubeSuite project file with cspj extension 4 Open Existing PM Project area a Open Existing PM Project Click the button to open the Open Project dialog box in order to open an existing PM project file with prw extension 5 Open Sample Project area a Open Sample Project Load a sample project file with cspj extension provided by CubeSuite Select the Microcontroller tab then select a sample project from the list Next click the E button to open the Browse For Folder dialog box and specify a folder to which to copy the sample project After copying the sample to the specified folder the sample project is loaded 6 Button Bo Minimizes the area Only the title text and minimize buttons will be shown Restores a minimized area R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 105 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Project dialog box This dialog box is used to create new projects or subprojects Caution A subproject cannot be added to another subproject Figure A 16 Create Project Dialog Box Create Project 1 ai Microcontroller Using microco
301. update history Restore hidden updates Change settings This is update for CubeSute Detail Help Bait NEC Electronics Corporation 20xx 20xx Select the check boxes of updates and click Download and install or Download only in the update selection area When Download and install is clicked 3 When Download only is clicked 5 Remarks 1 In the menu area select a microcontroller to only display update items for the selected microcontroller If you launched the CubeSuite Update Manager window by selecting Check for Updates from the Help menu of CubeSuite then update items for the microcontroller of the project currently open in CubeSuite is automatically selected 2 If Update Manager failed to obtain the information then the Error page appears 3 Download and install Update items selected on the Select updates page appears on the Download and install page Remark If there are the updates that must be installed together with the updates selected on the Select updates page a Message dialog box appears Click the Yes button on the Message dialog box to select the required updates R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 26 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 20 Download and install Page CubeSuite Update Manager NEC ELECTRONICS Select updates Al Download and install T8KOR RG3 uPD78F1166_A0 2 Updates sxx EB Update Install Downoad and
302. urce file Assembler source file Link directive file Link directive file Function information file Variable and function information file Section file Symbol information file Map file Symbol table file Hex file Hex file This file type is only shown for a debug dedicated project 2 This file type is only shown for microcontrollers with a memory bank b In the CPU Register panel Watch panel SFRpanel 78K0 78KOR IOR panel V850 Call Stack panel Local Variables panel The following file types file type are displayed This saves the contents of the panel in the file format selected from the drop down list Text files txt CSV Comma Separated Variables csv 2010 CENESAS Text format default CSV formatote Page 225 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal for matting c In the Output panel The following file types file type are displayed The file can only be saved in text format Text file txt Text format The following file types file type are displayed The file can only be saved in Excel format d In the Device Pin List panel Microsoft Office Excel Book xls Microsoft Office Excel Book format e In the Device Top View panel The following file types file type are displayed The file c
303. uring periodic checks for updates download them without asking for confirmation and notify the user when the download is complete R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 89 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notify me but do not automatically download them If corresponding updates are found during periodic checks for updates notify the user Do nothing If corresponding updates are found during periodic checks for updates do not notify the user 2 Internet Connections area Describes the Internet connection Function buttons Finalizes the settings reflects them and closes the dialog box Cancels any changes made to the settings and closes the dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 90 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Task Tray When the application is checking for or downloading updates in the background an icon appears in the Windows task tray Figure A 12 Sample Task Tray Display J Updates are found x Please click here to run updates 4 630 PM The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Appears automatically when the application is checking for or downloading updates in the background Description of each area 1 Task tray The following icons appear when the application is checking for or downloading updates in the backg
304. ut aout uf Open with Internal Editor Fe Open with Selected Application rt Open Folder with Explorer Add 3a Copy Chl C E ale Rename Property R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 247 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 4 Make Settings for Build Operations Configure CubeSuite to execute builds linked to an external build tool e g a compiler assembler other than the build tool provided by CubeSuite E 4 1 Set the commands You can link to an external build tool by executing the command set here when performing build related operations see E 5 Run a Build on CubeSuite The command settings are made with the Build category on the Build Options tab in the Property pane after select ing the Build Tool node of the target debug dedicated project main project or subproject on the project tree Figure E 13 Property Panel Build Options Tab Build Category Property A None Property E Build Mode Commands excecuted in the project building Commands excecuted in the project building 0 Commands excecuted in the project cleaning Commands excecuted in the project cleanine 0 Below are how to set the commands Setting the command when running a build Setting the command when running a clean 1 Setting the command when running a build Set the command to be executed when running a build see E 5 1 Run a build in the Commands executed i
305. wever that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 192 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE User Setting dialog box This dialog box allows you to customize toolbars and menus displayed in the Main window When this dialog box is open any button on a toolbar or any menu item in a menu bar currently displayed in the Main window can be dragged and dropped to the desired position to change the sequence of buttons or menu items or perform button menu item deletion Caution While this dialog box is open you cannot use functions of toolbars menus You can use these functions as usual after you close this dialog box Figure A 51 User Setting Dialog Box User Setting 1 Toolbars Commands Toolbars Debug Start amp Save 2 Edit view Panels Layout Editor Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Tab selection allows you to switch between the customization targets This dialog box has the following tabs Toolbars tab Commands tab 2 Customization area You can set detailed customization conditions For details of displayed items setting method see the
306. wever that this button will be disabled if no keys have been assigned to the command selected under Commands Reset All Resets all shortcut key setting to their default values Close Ends the shortcut key assignment and closes this dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 203 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rearrange Commands dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the arrangement including addition and deletion of menu items and buttons in the Main window Figure A 57 Rearrange Commands Dialog Box Rearrange Commands Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange 0 Menu Bar O Toobar Mainmenu o Commands Modify Selection oF Close File Close Project FE Save Project Save Subject Save Project As Function buttons 1 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Commands tab of the User Setting dialog box click the Rearrange Commands button Description of each area 1 Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange area This area allows you to specify the item whose position you want to change First select the Menu Bar if you want to change the menu item or Toolbar if you want to change the toolbar but ton using the option button and then select the category to be changed from the drop down list R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 2
307. will take prece dence If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end Specify an option for the plug in see 3 Plug in Options Start CubeSuite without displaying the Main window with the specified project file loaded The results of execution are output to the command prompt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 70 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 73 Command Prompt If Build Is Executed with CubeSuite exe ec Command Prompt LInformation Build Tool Start build all Tuesday September 14 2610 3 64 61 PHM LInformation Build Tool Start build command_line DefaultBuild gt LInformation Build Tool 7 SPC main c Information Build Tool Default Build sample lmf Information Build Tool gt DefaultBuild sample hex Information Build Tool Build ended tError 8 Warning gt LInformation Build Tool Ended Success 1 Projects Failed Projects Tuesday September 14 2 Ain 3 64 61 PM C Program Files Nec Electronics CubeSuite CubeSuite gt 2 When executing CubeSuiteW exe Execute CubeSuiteW exe to launch CubeSuite displaying the Main window and with plugins loaded in the same manner as when launching it from the Start menu The format to specify on the command line is shown below CubeSuiteW exeA npAplug in name plug in name A npall A plug in optionA plug in parameter Aproj
308. with absolute path is passed to the external tool If more than one file is selected the information for the file in which the cursor is located is passed if there is no selection then nothing is passed OutputDir The program passes the name of the folder with absolute path for the module that is output when the project for the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is built if there is no selection then nothing is passed ProjectDir The program passes the name of the folder with absolute path of the project for the item cur rently selected in the Project Tree panel if there is no selection then nothing is passed e Use Output panel Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel Messages will be output to the Output panel s Tool Name tab Tool Name is the string specified in Menu name F Uses the Windows command prompt for messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr default f Require options at startup The Character String Input opens enabling you to specify startup parameters for the new external tool Does not specify startup parameters for the new external tool default g Output unicode text This item is only enabled if the Use Output panel check box is selected Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel using the Uni code character set D
309. wn below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option of PM project gt Option of CubeSuite project Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user created build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that PM provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite for Tool name does not exist 4 Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a PM project and is not used in a CubeSuite project option that has been deleted by upgrading the compiler package and PM option exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user created build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that PM provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite for Tool name does not R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 59 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Save the Project File The project s settings information is saved to the pr
310. x for adding a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box and add the selected file s to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box create a file with the selected type and add it to the project A file extension is assigned to the new file and it is opened by the application Close Project Closes the currently open project If the currently open project or its files have been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Close File Closes the Editor Panel currently in focus If the file has been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Save Project Saves the settings of the currently open project to a project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box in order to save the settings of the cur rently open project to a project file with a different name Save Target Saves the file that is currently in focus Target Save Option Opens the Save Settings dialog box to set the encoding and newline code to use for the file being edited in the Editor panel Save Target As Opens the Save Target As dialog box in order to save the contents of the file cur rently in focus with a different name Save All Saves all files being updated in the Editor panel and the project Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box provided by Windows for printing Print Opens the Print dialog box provi
311. xample of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 Ox10 gt gt gt value debugger Memory Read 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt print value 16 gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 MemoryOption HalfWord 0x0010 gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 309 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Write This function references the memory Specification format debugger Memory Write address value memoryOption MemoryOption Byte Argumeni s memoryOption Specify the unit to set The units that can be specified are shown below Byte unit 8 bits default HalF word unit 16 bis V850 Word unit 78K 16 bits V850 32 bits Return value None Detailed description This function sets the value at the address specified by address according to memoryOption Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt debugger Memory Write 0x100 OxFF gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 OxFF gt gt gt debugger Memory Write 0x100 MemoryOption HalfWord gt gt gt R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 310 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX F Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Next This function performs procedure step execution Specification format debugger Next nextOption NextOption Source Argumeni s nex
312. y you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 commands can be specified The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to this build tool Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Note that this setting is common to all the build modes Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 133 of 353 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files The file is opened by automatically distinguishing the encoding Shift_JIS EUC JP UTF 8 and line feed code of the file and the encoding is retained when it is saved If the encoding and newline code is specified in the Save Seitings dialog box however then the file is saved in accordance with those settings This panel can be multiply opened max 100 panels Remark A message is shown when the downloaded load module file is older than the source file to be opened Figure A 24 Editor Panel 1 B main c x 1 e A PA E E E Ce cE c c c r r ces a ce oe c c de r de cE c c ca c c c r rE cE ee
313. y PM and built normally can be loaded into CubeSuite 2 If there is already a subproject file in the same folder and with the same file name excluding the file extension as the project file then the project file will not be saved correctly Change the name of the main project or the subproject on the project tree 2 When opening from a PM project file prj Files are converted to CubeSuite projects according to the rules below PM projects are converted to projects with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name cspj Remark When reading a project without build tools specified build tools are set according to the microcontroller R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 57 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Caution Remarks 1 Only projects that can be loaded by PM and built normally can be loaded into CubeSuite The target for conversion is the file structure information of the PM project file and the build mode build options information When build options have been added from the version of the target build tools in the PM project to the version of the build tools after conversion the added options are set to the build tools default values after conversion The project files after conversion are created in the folder the PM project file was placed in If there is already a project file with the same name _number_ number 1 2 will be a
314. y to register external tools that can be launched directly from CubeSuite and configure these external tools when they are so launched Registering an external tool here allows it to be launched directly via the Tool menu Figure A 47 Option Dialog Box General External Tools Category General External Tools Startup and Exit Display Text Editor Menu list Font and Color New External Tool Hag External Tools Build Debug Jp ate ay Up E E Others User Information Menu name New External Tool Command path Startup foler Use Qutput panel Require options at startup Glose window when command exit The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Registered external tools area a Menu list area This area displays a list of menu items added to the Tool menu for launching external tools that have been added via this dialog box To add a new external tool click the New button R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 183 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE When you click the New button the item New External Tool is added to the bottom of the list In this state configure the details of the external tool to add in the New registration area Up to 8 external tools can be registered To
315. your technical support contact Additional Information Product License for Evaluators Sales Company Please write a question on this place System Information OS Version Microgott Windows F Professional Version 5 1 Build 2600 Service Pack 3 Language Englith United States WET Framework Wersion Microgott WET Framework 2 0 Service Pack 2 3 5 5P1 2 0 5607 27 S082 Snonleation Infarmatinrn hal The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu Contact Information for Technical Support dialog box dedicated items Context menu Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select Contact Info for Tech support Center Click the Contact Information For The Tool Support Center button in the Message dialog box R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 209 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Information text area Show the information needed to contact to Tool Support Center The necessary information is as follows User Information Showed input in Option dialog box NET Framework Version System Information Windows information Application Information CubeSuite information Plug in Information DLL information for each CubeSuite in use R20UT0256EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 210 of 353 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDI
316. ython CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Property Name Function Description debugger Opiton Coverage debug This property sets or reference the options of the debug tool ger Option OpenBreak debug ger Option Timer debugger Option Trace debug ger Option UseTraceData debugger XTrace Addup debug This property sets or reference the tracing options of the debug tool ger X Trace Complement debug ger XTrace Mode CubeSuite Python functions have the following limitations If a parameter has a default value then the Specification format parameter is described in the form parameter name default value You can also specify parameters by value only Example If the Specification format is function arg1 arg2 1 arg3 True then arg has no default value arg2 has a default value of 1 and arg3 has a default value of True The parameters can be specified as follows function arg7 arg2 arg3 Parameters with default values can be omitted This is only possible however if the parameter can be determined Example If the Specification format is function arg1 arg2 1 arg3 True gt gt gt function main It is assumed that function main 1 True gt gt gt function main 2 It is assumed that function main 2 True gt gt gt function main arg3 False It is assumed that function main 1 False gt gt gt function main False NG because it is assumed that argil False a

CubeSuite Ver.1.40 Integrated Development Environment User`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents